Main Menu: 2008 Civic Hybrid

０７／０８／０７１７：４６：２２３１ＳＮＣ６２００００２
Main Menu
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2008 Honda Civic Hybrid was a wise As you read this manual, you will
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to information is intended to help you
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your vehicle, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual

helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff
is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.
Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer
any questions and concerns.
2008 Civic Hybrid i

０７／０８／０７１７：４６：２６３１ＳＮＣ６２００００３
Main Menu
Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
ii 2008 Civic Hybrid

０７／０８／０７１７：４６：３７３１ＳＮＣ６２００００４
Main Menu
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility. Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
To help you make informed three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
decisions about safety, we have These signal words mean:
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
this manual. This information alerts HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
hazards associated with operating or instructions.
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement. Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
2008 Civic Hybrid iii

2008 Civic Hybrid Online Reference Owner's Manual
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety .............................................................................................................................. iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ...................................................................................................... 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) .......................................................... 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column) ......................................... 55
Features (climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, and cruise control)........................................................ 101
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break- in, and cargo loading) ............................................................................ 173
Driving (engine and transmission operation) ...................................................................................................... 189
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)..................................................... 205
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses) ..................................... 241
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) ................................................ 265
Warranty and Customer Relations (U. S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ......... 279
Authorized Manuals (U. S. only) (how to order) ........................................................................................... 283
Index ............................................................................................................................... ...................................... I
Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)
00X31-SNC-6200
1
０７／０８／０７１７：４７：０６３１ＳＮＣ６２００００７
Main Menu
Overview of Contents
Contents Before Driving Warranty and Customer

A convenient reference to the What gasoline to use, how to break- Relations
sections in this manual. in your new vehicle, and how to load (U.S. and Canada only)
luggage and other cargo. A summary of the warranties
Your Vehicle at a Glance covering your new vehicle, and how
A quick reference to the main Driving to contact us for any reason. Refer to
controls in your vehicle. The proper way to start the engine, your warranty manual for detailed
shift the transmission, and park. information.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important information about the Maintenance Authorized Manuals
proper use and care of your vehicle’s The maintenance minder shows you (U.S. only)
seat belts, an overview of the when you need to take your vehicle How to order manuals and other
supplemental restraint system, and to the dealer for maintenance service. technical literature.
valuable information on how to There is also a list of things to check
protect children with child restraints. and instructions on how to check Index
them.
Instruments and Controls Service Information Summary
Explains the purpose of each Taking Care of the Unexpected A summary of the information you
instrument panel indicator and gauge, This section covers several problems need when you pull up to the fuel
and how to use the controls on the motorists sometimes experience, pump.
dashboard and steering column. and details how to handle them.
Features Technical Information

How to operate the heating and air ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
conditioning system, the audio and technical information.
system, and other convenience
features.
2 2008 Civic Hybrid
０７／０８／０７１７：４７：１２３１ＳＮＣ６２００００８
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P. 58) AUDIO SYSTEM (P. 108) PASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAG
GAUGES (P. 64) (P. 9, 24)
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P. 9, 24)
MIRROR CONTROLS CLIMATE CONTROL

(P. 96) SYSTEM
(P. 102)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH DOOR LOCK TAB
(P. 80) (P. 80)
POWER WINDOW ACCESSORY

SWITCHES POWER SOCKET
(P. 94) (P. 99)
FUEL FILL DOOR

RELEASE HANDLE
(P. 175)
TRUNK RELEASE
HANDLE
(P. 87) AUXILIARY INPUT JACK AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (CVT)
(P. 167) (P. 192)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown
2008 Civic Hybrid 3

０７／０８／０７１７：４７：２０３１ＳＮＣ６２００００９
Main Menu
INSTRUMENT PANEL HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

BRIGHTNESS BUTTONS (P. 73) (P. 72)
(P. 74)
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
DISPLAY CHANGE INDICATOR
BUTTON (P. 31)
(P. 65)
SEL/RESET
BUTTON
(P. 64)
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
(P. 75)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
(P. 167) REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
(P. 75)
VOICE CONTROL HEATED MIRRORS＊2
SWITCHES＊3 (P. 96)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P. 176)
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS
(P. 76) (P. 170)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown HORN＊1
＊1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
＊2 : Canadian model only
＊3 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
4 2008 Civic Hybrid
０７／０８／０７１７：４７：２４３１ＳＮＣ６２０００１０
Main Menu
This section gives you important Additional Information About All Children Should Sit in a
information about how to protect Your Seat Belts ........................ 18 Back Seat .................................. 35
yourself and your passengers. It Seat Belt System Components ... 18 The Passenger’s Front Airbag
shows you how to use seat belts. It Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 19 Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 35

explains how your airbags work. And Automatic Seat Belt If You Must Drive with Several
it tells you how to properly restrain Tensioners ................................ 19 Children .................................... 37
infants and children in your vehicle. Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 20 If a Child Requires Close
Additional Information About Attention ................................... 37
Your Airbags ............................ 21 Additional Safety Precautions .... 38
Airbag System Components ....... 21 Protecting Infants and Small
How Your Front Airbags Children .................................... 39
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6 Work.......................................... 24 Protecting Infants ........................ 39
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28 Protecting Small Children .......... 40
Seat Belts ........................................ 8 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 41
Airbags ............................................ 9 Work.......................................... 29 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 42
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 30 With LATCH ................................ 43
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11 How the Side Airbag Off With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 45
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 11 Indicator Works ....................... 30 With a Tether ............................... 46
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 12 How the Passenger Airbag Off Protecting Larger Children ............ 48
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 13 Indicator Works ....................... 31 Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 48
5. Fasten and Position the Airbag Service .............................. 32 Using a Booster Seat ................... 49
Seat Belts .............................. 14 Additional Safety Precautions .... 32 When Can a Larger Child Sit in
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Protecting Children−General Front .......................................... 50
Position ................................. 15 Guidelines ................................. 34 Additional Safety Precautions .... 51
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16 All Children Must Be Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 52
Additional Safety Precautions .... 17 Restrained ................................ 34 Safety Labels .................................... 53
2008 Civic Hybrid 5

０７／０８／０７１７：４７：３４３１ＳＮＣ６２０００１１
Main Menu Table Of Contents
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety Restrain All Children every additional drink. So don’t drink
recommendations throughout this Children age 12 and under should and drive, and don’t let your friends
section, and throughout this manual. ride properly restrained in a back drink and drive, either.
The recommendations on this page seat, not the front seat. Infants and
are the ones we consider to be the small children should be restrained Control Your Speed
most important. in a child seat. Larger children Excessive speed is a major factor in
should use a booster seat and a lap/ crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
Always Wear Your Seat Belt shoulder belt until they can use the the higher the speed, the greater the
A seat belt is your best protection in belt properly without a booster seat risk, but serious injuries can also
all types of collisions. Airbags are (see pages 34 − 51 ). occur at lower speeds. Never drive
designed to supplement seat belts, faster than is safe for current
not replace them. So even though Be Aware of Airbag Hazards conditions, regardless of the
your vehicle is equipped with airbags, While airbags can save lives, they maximum speed posted.
make sure you and your passengers can cause serious or fatal injuries to
always wear your seat belts, and occupants who sit too close to them, Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
wear them properly (see page 14 ). or are not properly restrained. Condition
Infants, young children, and short Having a tire blowout or a
adults are at the greatest risk. Be mechanical failure can be extremely
sure to follow all instructions and hazardous. To reduce the possibility
warnings in this manual. of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
Don’t Drink and Drive and perform all regularly scheduled
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even maintenance (see page 207 ).
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
6 2008 Civic Hybrid

０７／０８／０７１７：４７：４１３１ＳＮＣ６２０００１２
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
(3) (9) Your vehicle is equipped with many

(9) (1) (4) features that work together to
(8) protect you and your passengers
(7) during a crash.

Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
(2) zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
(6) seat belts in a crash.
(5) (10) (8)
(12) However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
(11) (1) Safety Cage features unless you remain sitting in
(2) (2) Crush Zone a proper position and always wear
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(5) Collapsible Steering Column features can contribute to injuries if
(6) Seat Belts they are not used properly.
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags The following pages explain how you
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners can take an active role in protecting
(11) Door Locks yourself and your passengers.
(12) Front Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners
2008 Civic Hybrid 7

０７／０８／０７１７：４７：５３３１ＳＮＣ６２０００１３
Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Your vehicle is equipped with seat against the inside of the vehicle
belts in all seating positions. Not wearing a seat belt properly and against other occupants.
increases the chance of serious
Your seat belt system also includes injury or death in a crash, even Keep you from being thrown out
an indicator on the instrument panel though your vehicle has airbags. of the vehicle.
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts. Be sure you and your Help keep you in a good position
passengers always wear seat should the airbags ever deploy. A
Why Wear Seat Belts belts and wear them properly. good position reduces the risk of
Seat belts are the single most injury from an inflating airbag and
effective safety device for adults and allows you to get the best
larger children. (Infants and smaller When properly worn, seat belts: advantage from the airbag.
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.) Keep you connected to the vehicle Of course, seat belts cannot
so you can take advantage of the completely protect you in every
Not wearing a seat belt properly vehicle’s built-in safety features. crash. But in most cases, seat belts
increases the chance of serious can reduce your risk of serious
injury or death in a crash, even Help protect you in almost every injury.
though your vehicle has airbags. type of crash, including frontal,
side and rear impacts, and What You Should Do:
In addition, most states and all rollovers. Always wear your seat belt, and
Canadian provinces require you to make sure you wear it properly.
wear seat belts.
8 2008 Civic Hybrid

０７／０８／０７１７：４８：０１３１ＳＮＣ６２０００１４
Airbags

Your vehicle has a supplemental Your vehicle also has side airbags to In addition, your vehicle has side
restraint system (SRS) with front help protect the upper torso of the curtain airbags to help protect the
airbags to help protect the heads and driver or a front seat passenger heads of the driver, front passenger,
chests of the driver and a front seat during a moderate to severe side and passengers in the outer rear
passenger during a moderate to impact (see page 28 for more seating positions during a moderate
severe frontal collision (see page information on how your side airbags to severe side impact (see page
24 for more information on how work). 29 for more information on how
your front airbags work). your side curtain airbags work).
CONTINUED
2008 Civic Hybrid 9

０７／０８／０７１７：４８：０７３１ＳＮＣ６２０００１５
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear The rest of this section gives more
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit detailed information about how you
upright and as far back from the can maximize your safety.
Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel as possible while
They are designed to supplement allowing full control of the vehicle. A Remember however, that no safety
the seat belts. front passenger should move their system can prevent all injures or
seat as far back from the dashboard deaths that can occur in a severe
Airbags offer no protection in rear as possible. crash, even when seat belts are
impacts, or minor frontal or side properly worn and the airbags deploy.
collisions.
Airbags can pose hazards. To do

their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So while
airbags help save lives, they can
cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
10 2008 Civic Hybrid

０７／０８／０７１７：４８：１７３１ＳＮＣ６２０００１６
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction 2.Adjust the Front Seats

The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly Your vehicle has a door-open
protect the driver, adult passengers indicator on the instrument panel to

and teenage children who are large indicate when any door is not tightly
enough and mature enough to drive closed.
or ride in the front seat.
Locking the doors reduces the
See pages 34 − 51 for important chance of someone being thrown out
guidelines on how to properly of the vehicle during a crash, and it
protect infants, small children, and helps prevent passengers from
larger children who ride in your accidentally opening a door and
vehicle. falling out.
1.Close and Lock the Doors Locking the doors also helps prevent Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
After everyone has entered the an outsider from unexpectedly rear as possible while allowing you to
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed opening a door when you come to a maintain full control of the vehicle.
and locked. stop. Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
See page 80 for how to lock the
doors, page 60 for how the door-open
indicator works, and page 81 for how
the automatic door locking and
unlocking feature works.
CONTINUED
2008 Civic Hybrid 11

０７／０８／０７１７：４８：２５３１ＳＮＣ６２０００１７
If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front Sitting too close to a front
airbag, or by striking the steering airbag can result in serious
wheel or dashboard. injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Always sit as far back from the
Canada recommend that drivers front airbags as possible.
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the rock it back and forth to make sure it
steering wheel up and down, and in is locked in position.
and out (see page 76 ). Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
See page 90 for how to adjust the comfortable, upright position,
If you cannot get far enough away front seats. leaving ample space between your
from the steering wheel and still chest and the airbag cover in the
reach the controls, we recommend center of the steering wheel.
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help. Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.

０７／０８／０７１７：４８：３４３１ＳＮＣ６２０００１８
4.Adjust the Head Restraints When a passenger is seated in the

rear center seating position, make
Reclining the seat-back too far sure the center head restraint is
can result in serious injury or adjusted to its highest position.

death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an

upright position, and sit well Improperly positioning head
back in the seat. restraints reduces their
effectiveness, and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer Make sure head restraints are
rests against the occupant’s chest in place and positioned properly
reduces the protective capability of Adjust the driver’s head restraint so before driving.
the belt. It also increases the chance the center of the back of your head
of sliding under the belt in a crash rests against the center of the
and being seriously injured. The restraint. Properly adjusted head restraints
farther a seat-back is reclined, the will help protect occupants from
greater the risk of injury. Have passengers adjust their head whiplash and other crash injuries.
restraints properly as well. Taller
See page 91 for how to adjust the persons should adjust their restraint See page 91 for how to adjust the
seat-backs. as high as possible. head restraints and how the driver’s
and front passenger’s active head
restraints work.

０７／０８／０７１７：４８：４０３１ＳＮＣ６２０００１９
5.Fasten and Position the Seat

Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, Improperly positioning the seat
then tug on the belt to make sure the belts can cause serious injury
belt is securely latched. Check that or death in a crash.
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious Make sure all seat belts are
injuries in a crash. properly positioned before
driving.
If the seat belt touches or crosses

your neck, or if it crosses your arm
Position the lap part of the belt as instead of your shoulder, you need to
low as possible across your hips, adjust the seat belt anchor height.
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly. If necessary, pull up on the belt again
This lets your strong pelvic bones to remove any slack, then check that
take the force of a crash and reduces the belt rests across the center of
the chance of internal injuries. your chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.

０７／０８／０７１７：４８：４８３１ＳＮＣ６２０００２０
RELEASE BUTTON Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or Position
behind your back. This could cause After all occupants have adjusted
very serious injuries in a crash. their seats and head restraints, and

put on their seat belts, it is very
If a seat belt does not seem to work important that they continue to sit
properly, it may not protect the upright, well back in their seats, with
occupant in a crash. their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
No one should sit in a seat with an off.
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can Sitting improperly can increase the
result in serious injury or death. chance of injury during a crash. For
The front seats have adjustable seat Have your dealer check the belt as example, if an occupant slouches,
belt anchors. To adjust the height of soon as possible. lies down, turns sideways, sits
an anchor, press and hold the release forward, leans forward or sideways,
button and slide the anchor up or See page 18 for additional or puts one or both feet up, the
down as needed (it has four information about your seat belts chance of injury during a crash is
positions). and how to take care of them. greatly increased.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１７：４８：５４３１ＳＮＣ６２０００２１
In addition, an occupant who is out of Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit
position in the front seat can be upright and adjust the seat as far
seriously or fatally injured in a crash back as possible while allowing full
by striking interior parts of the control of the vehicle. When riding
vehicle or being struck by an as a front passenger, adjust the seat
inflating front airbag. as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries

to both you and your unborn child
Sitting improperly or out of that can be caused by a crash or an
position can result in serious inflating front airbag.
injury or death in a crash.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
Always sit upright, well back in your doctor if it’s okay for you to
the seat, with your feet on the If you are pregnant, the best way to drive.
floor. protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.

０７／０８／０７１７：４９：０１３１ＳＮＣ６２０００２２
Additional Safety Precautions Do not place hard or sharp objects Keep your hands and arms away
Two people should never use the between yourself and a front from the airbag covers. If your
same seat belt. If they do, they airbag. Carrying hard or sharp hands or arms are close to an
could be very seriously injured in a objects on your lap, or driving with airbag cover, they could be injured

crash. a pipe or other sharp object in if the airbag inflates.
your mouth, can result in injuries
Do not put any accessories on seat if your front airbag inflates. Do not attach hard objects on or
belts. Devices intended to improve near a door. If a side airbag or a
occupant comfort or reposition the Do not attach or place objects on side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
shoulder part of a seat belt can the front airbag covers. Objects on holder or other hard object
reduce the protective capability of the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ attached on or near the door could
the seat belt and increase the could interfere with the proper be propelled inside the vehicle and
chance of serious injury in a crash. operation of the airbags or be hurt someone.
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

０７／０８／０７１７：４９：１１３１ＳＮＣ６２０００２３
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components your seat belt is not fastened before If the indicator comes on or the
Your seat belt system includes lap/ the beeper stops, the indicator will beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
shoulder belts in all seating positions. stop flashing but remain on. belt is latched and there is no front
The front seat belts are also seat passenger and no items on the
equipped with automatic seat belt If a front passenger does not fasten front seat, something may be
tensioners. their seat belt, the indicator will interfering with the monitoring
come on about 6 seconds after the system. Look for and remove:
This system uses the same sensors ignition switch is turned to the ON
as the front airbags to monitor (II) position. Any items under the front
whether the front seat belts are passenger’s seat.
latched or unlatched, and how much If either the driver or a front
weight is on the front passenger’s passenger does not fasten their seat Any object(s) hanging on the seat
seat (see pages 26 and 27 ). belt while driving, the beeper will or in the seat-back pocket.
sound and the indicator will flash
Seat Belt Indicator again at regular intervals. Any object on the floor that is
touching the rear of the seat-back.
The seat belt system includes an When no one is sitting in the front
indicator on the instrument panel passenger’s seat, or a child or small If no obstructions are found, have
and a beeper to remind you and your adult is riding there, the indicator your vehicle checked by a dealer.
passengers to fasten your seat belts. should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If

０７／０８／０７１７：４９：２１３１ＳＮＣ６２０００２４
Lap/Shoulder Belt restrain your body. Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest, The seat belts in all positions except
and across your hips. the driver’s have a lockable retractor

that must be activated to secure a
To fasten the belt, insert the latch child seat (see page 45 ).
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is If the shoulder part of the belt is
latched (see page 14 for how to pulled all the way out, the lockable
properly position the belt). retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
To unlock the belt, press the red passenger to move freely.
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
the belt across your body so that it To deactivate the lockable retractor,
retracts completely. After exiting the unlatch the buckle and let the seat For added protection, the front seat
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the belt fully retract. To refasten the belts are equipped with automatic
way and will not get closed in the seat belt, pull it out only as far as seat belt tensioners. When activated,
door. needed. the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
All seat belts have an emergency a front passenger in position.
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in The tensioners are designed to
your seat while it keeps some activate in any collision severe
tension on the belt. During a collision enough to cause a front, side, or side
or sudden stop, the retractor curtain airbag to inflate.
automatically locks the belt to help CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１７：４９：２９３１ＳＮＣ６２０００２５
If a side airbag or side curtain airbag Seat Belt Maintenance If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
deploys during a side impact, the For safety, you should check the it must be replaced by your dealer. A
tensioner on that side of the vehicle condition of your seat belts regularly. belt that has been worn during a
will also deploy. crash may not provide the same level
Pull each belt out fully, and look for of protection in a subsequent crash.
The tensioners can also be activated frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
during a collision in which the front that the latches work smoothly and The dealer should also inspect the
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the the belts retract easily. If a belt does anchors for damage and replace
airbags would not be needed, but the not retract easily, cleaning the belt them if needed. If the automatic seat
additional restraint could be helpful. may correct the problem (see page belt tensioners activate during a
229 ). Any belt that is not in good crash, they must be replaced.
When the tensioners are activated, condition or working properly will
the seat belts will remain tight until not provide good protection and
they are unbuckled. should be replaced as soon as
possible. Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
Honda provides a limited warranty injury or death if the seat belts
on seat belts. See your Honda do not work properly when
Warranty Information booklet for needed.
details.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.

０７／０８／０７１７：４９：３６３１ＳＮＣ６２０００２６
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
(8) (1) (9) (2)

(3) (12) (11)
(5)
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag

(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit (4)
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags (7) (10)
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor (13)
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors (6)
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Side Impact Sensors (First) (5) (14)
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(13) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners (10) (4)
(14) Rear Safing Sensor
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１７：４９：４２３１ＳＮＣ６２０００２７
Your Airbag System includes:
Two SRS (supplemental restraint

system) front airbags. The driver’s
(16) airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 24 ).
Two side airbags, one for the

driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 28 ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for

(15) each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
(15) and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
(15) Side Impact Sensor (Second) 29 ).
(16) Side Curtain Airbags

０７／０８／０７１７：４９：５０３１ＳＮＣ６２０００２８
Automatic front seat belt Weight sensors that monitor the An indicator on the instrument
tensioners (see page 19 ). weight on the front passenger’s panel that alerts you that the
seat. If the weight is about 65 passenger’s side airbag has been
Sensors that can detect a lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight turned off (see page 30 ).

moderate to severe front impact or of an infant or small child), the
side impact. passenger’s front airbag will be An indicator on the dashboard that
turned off (see page 26 ). alerts you that the passenger’s
Sensors that can detect whether front airbag has been turned off
a child is in the passenger’s side A sophisticated electronic system (see page 31 ).
airbag path and signal the that continually monitors and
control unit to turn the airbag records information about the Emergency backup power in case
off (see page 31 ). sensors, the control unit, the your vehicle’s electrical system is
airbag activators, the seat belt disconnected in a crash.
Sensors that can detect whether tensioners, and driver and front
the driver’s seat belt and the passenger seat belt use when the
front passenger’s seat belt are ignition switch is in the ON (II)
latched or unlatched (see page position.
18 ).
An indicator on the instrument
A driver’s seat position sensor that panel that alerts you to a possible
monitors the distance of the seat problem with your airbags,
from the front airbag. If the seat is sensors, or seat belt tensioners
too far forward, the airbag will (see page 30 ).
inflate with less force (see page
26 ).

０７／０８／０７１７：４９：５９３１ＳＮＣ６２０００２９
How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally

inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a

collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
If you ever have a moderate to such cases, the seat belt will provide After inflating, the front airbags
severe frontal collision, sensors will sufficient protection, and the immediately deflate, so they won’t
detect the vehicle’s rapid supplemental protection offered by interfere with the driver’s visibility,
deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high Only the driver’s airbag will deploy if
enough, the control unit will instantly there is no passenger in the front The total time for inflation and
inflate the driver’s and front seat, or if the advanced airbag deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
passenger’s airbags, at the time and system has turned the passenger’s fast that most occupants are not
with the force needed. airbag off (see page 31 ). aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.

０７／０８／０７１７：５０：０７３１ＳＮＣ６２０００３０
After a crash, you may see what Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags
looks like smoke. This is actually Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual-
powder from the airbag’s surface. airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this
Although the powder is not harmful, inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment

people with respiratory problems sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether
may experience some temporary depending on crash severity. sensors detect the occupant is
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of wearing a seat belt or not.
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do In a more severe crash, both stages
so. will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
In a less severe crash, one stage will occupant would need extra
ignite first, then the second stage protection.
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
with a little less force. airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１７：５０：１７３１ＳＮＣ６２０００３１
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work

properly: DRIVER’S PASSENGER’S
SEAT SEAT WEIGHT
POSITION SENSORS
Occupants must sit upright and SENSOR
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or The driver’s advanced front airbag The passenger’s advanced front
under the seats, cover the sensors, system includes a seat position airbag system has weight sensors
or put any objects or metal items sensor under the seat. If the seat is under the seat. Although Honda
under the front seats. too far forward, the airbag will does not encourage carrying an
inflate with less force, regardless of infant or small child in front, if the
Back-seat passengers should not the severity of the impact. sensors detect the weight of an
put their feet under the front seats. infant or small child (up to about 65
If there is a problem with the sensor, lbs or 29 kg), the system will
Failure to follow these instructions the SRS indicator will come on, and automatically turn the passenger’s
could damage the sensors or prevent the airbag will inflate in the normal front airbag off.
them from working properly. manner regardless of the driver’s Be aware that objects placed on the
seating position. passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.

０７／０８／０７１７：５０：２３３１ＳＮＣ６２０００３２
When the airbag is turned off, a Moving the front seat forcibly Also, make sure the floor mat behind
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in back against cargo on the seat or the front passenger’s seat is hooked
the center of the dashboard comes floor behind it. to the floor mat anchor (see page
on (see page 31 ). 229 ). If it is not, the mat may

Hanging heavy items on the front interfere with the proper operation
If the weight sensors detect there is passenger seat, or placing heavy of the sensors and operation of the
no passenger in the front seat, the items in the seat-back pocket. seat.
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will
not come on.
To ensure that the passenger’s

advanced front airbag system will
work properly, do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
This includes:
A rear passenger pushing or

pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.

０７／０８／０７１７：５０：３１３１ＳＮＣ６２０００３３
How Your Side Airbags Work Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System
side impact. If the impact is on the Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
passenger’s side, the passenger’s system designed primarily to protect
side airbag will deploy even if there a child riding in the front passenger’s
is no passenger. seat.
To get the best protection from the Although Honda does not encourage
side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, if position
should wear their seat belts and sit sensors detect a child has leaned into
upright and well back in their seats. the side airbag’s deployment path,
the airbag will shut off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a

short adult leans sideways, or a
If you ever have a moderate to larger adult slouches and leans
severe side impact, sensors will sideways into the airbag’s
detect rapid acceleration and signal deployment path.
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s Objects placed on the front
side airbag and activate the seat belt passenger seat can also cause the
tensioner on the affected side. side airbag to be shut off.

０７／０８／０７１７：５０：３８３１ＳＮＣ６２０００３４
If the side airbag off indicator comes How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passenger’s
on (see page 30 ), have the Work side, the passenger’s side curtain
passenger sit upright. Once the airbag will inflate even if there are no
passenger is out of the airbag’s occupants on that side of the vehicle.

deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the To get the best protection from the
indicator will go out. side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
There will be some delay between upright and well back in their seats.
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a In a moderate to severe side impact,
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff sensors will detect rapid acceleration
system from working properly. and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.

０７／０８／０７１７：５０：４９３１ＳＮＣ６２０００３５
How the SRS Indicator Works How the Side Airbag Off
The SRS indicator alerts Indicator Works
you to a potential problem Ignoring the SRS indicator can U.S. Canada
with your airbags or seat belt result in serious injury or death
tensioners. if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly. This indicator alerts you that the
When you turn the ignition switch to passenger’s side airbag has been
the ON (II) position, this indicator Have your vehicle checked by a automatically shut off. It does not
comes on for several seconds then dealer as soon as possible if mean there is a problem with your
goes off. This tells you the system is the SRS indicator alerts you to side airbags.
working properly. a possible problem.
When you turn the ignition switch to
If the indicator comes on at any the ON (II) position, the indicator
other time, or does not come on at all, If you see any of these indications, should come on for several seconds
you should have the system checked the airbags and seat belt tensioners and then go off (see page 59 ). If it
by your dealer. For example: may not work properly when you doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes
need them. on while driving without a passenger
If the SRS indicator does not come in the front seat, have the system
on after you turn the ignition checked.
switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator stays on after the

engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or

flashes on and off while you drive.

０７／０８／０７１７：５０：５９３１ＳＮＣ６２０００３６
How the Passenger Airbag Off Be aware that objects placed on the If the indicator comes on with no
Indicator Works front seat can cause the indicator to front seat passenger and no objects
come on. on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering

U.S.
If no weight is detected on the front with the weight sensors. Look for
seat, the airbag will be automatically and remove:
shut off. However, the indicator will
Canada not come on. Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if Any object(s) hanging on the seat
the total weight on the seat is near or in the seat-back pocket.
the airbag cutoff threshold.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR Any object on the floor that is
If an adult or teenage passenger is touching the rear of the seat-back.
This indicator alerts you that the riding in front, move the seat as far
passenger’s front airbag has been to the rear as possible, and have the If no obstructions are found, have
shut off because weight sensors passenger sit upright and wear the your vehicle checked by a dealer as
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less seat belt properly. soon as possible.
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.

０７／０８／０７１７：５１：０６３１ＳＮＣ６２０００３７
Airbag Service The SRS indicator alerts you to a Additional Safety Precautions
Your airbag systems are virtually problem. Take your vehicle to an Do not attempt to deactivate your
maintenance free, and there are no authorized dealer as soon as airbags. Together, airbags and
parts you can safely service. possible. If you ignore this seat belts provide the best
However, you must have your indication, your airbags may not protection.
vehicle serviced if: operate properly.
Do not tamper with airbag
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag If your vehicle has a moderate to components or wiring for any
that has deployed must be severe impact. Even if your reason. Tampering could cause
replaced along with the control airbags do not inflate, your dealer the airbags to deploy, possibly
unit and other related parts. Any should inspect the driver’s seat causing very serious injury.
seat belt tensioner that activates position sensor, the front
must also be replaced. passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
Do not try to remove or replace seat belts worn during a crash to
any airbag by yourself. This must make sure they are operating
be done by an authorized dealer or properly.
a knowledgeable body shop.

０７／０８／０７１７：５１：１０３１ＳＮＣ６２０００３８
Do not remove or modify a front Do not cover or replace front seat- Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat without consulting your back covers without consulting seat-back to liquid. If water or
dealer. This could make the your dealer. Improperly replacing another liquid soaks into a seat-
driver’s seat position sensor or the or covering front seat-back covers back, it can prevent the side airbag

front passenger’s weight sensors can prevent your side airbags from cutoff system from working
ineffective. If it is necessary to inflating during a side impact. properly.
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.

０７／０８／０７１７：５１：１８３１ＳＮＣ６２０００３９
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle seriously injured or killed in a
accidents are the number one cause crash.
of the death of children age 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every state and larger child should be properly
Canadian province requires that restrained with a seat belt and
infants and children be properly use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect restrained when they ride in a
them. However, despite their best vehicle.
intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
passengers. restrained in an approved child seat a booster seat until the seat belt fits
that is properly secured to the them properly (see pages 48 − 51 ).
If you have children, or ever need to vehicle (see pages 39 − 47 ).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.

０７／０８／０７１７：５１：２８３１ＳＮＣ６２０００４０
All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger’s Front Airbag Small Children
Seat Can Pose Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to accident statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger’s front airbag can

safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this, be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
back seat. the passenger’s front airbag is quite too far forward, or the child’s head is
The National Highway Traffic Safety large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an
Administration and Transport force to cause very serious injuries. inflating front airbag can strike the
Canada recommend that all children child with enough force to kill or
aged 12 and under be properly Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child.
restrained in a back seat. Some advanced front airbag system that
states have laws restricting where automatically turns the passenger’s Larger Children
children may ride. front airbag off (see page 31 ), Children who have outgrown child
please follow these guidelines: seats are also at risk of being injured
Children who ride in back are less or killed by an inflating passenger’s
likely to be injured by striking Infants front airbag. Whenever possible,
interior vehicle parts during a Never put a rear-facing child seat in larger children should sit in the back
collision or hard braking. Also, the front seat of a vehicle equipped seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
children cannot be injured by an with a passenger’s front airbag. If be properly restrained with a seat
inflating front airbag when they ride the airbag inflates, it can hit the back belt. (See page 48 for important
in the back. of the child seat with enough force information about protecting larger
to kill or very seriously injure an children.)
infant.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１７：５１：４１３１ＳＮＣ６２０００４１
To remind you of the passenger’s U.S. Models

front airbag hazards, and that SUN VISORS DASHBOARD
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
SUN VISORS

０７／０８／０７１７：５１：４９３１ＳＮＣ６２０００４２
If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close If a child requires close physical
Children Attention attention or frequent visual contact,
Your vehicle has a back seat where Many parents say they prefer to put we strongly recommend that another
children can be properly restrained. an infant or a small child in the front adult ride with the child in the back

If you ever have to carry a group of passenger seat so they can watch the seat. The back seat is far safer for a
children, and a child must ride in child, or because the child requires child than the front.
front: attention.
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 48 ). attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
Move the vehicle seat as far to the driving, placing both of you at risk.
rear as possible (see page 90 ).
Have the child sit upright and well

back in the seat (see page 15 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly

positioned and secured (see page
14 ).

０７／０８／０７１７：５１：５８３１ＳＮＣ６２０００４３
Additional Safety Precautions Make sure any unused seat belt Lock all doors and the trunk when
Never hold an infant or child on that a child can reach is buckled, your vehicle is not in use. Children
your lap. If you are not wearing a the lockable retractor is activated, who play in vehicles can
seat belt in a crash, you could be and the belt is fully retracted and accidentally get trapped inside.
thrown forward and crush the locked. If a child wraps a loose Teach your children not to play in
child against the dashboard or a seat belt around their neck, they or around vehicles. Know how to
seat-back. If you are wearing a can be seriously or fatally injured. operate the emergency trunk
seat belt, the child can be torn (See pages 45 and 46 for how to opener and decide if your children
from your arms and be seriously activate and deactivate the should be shown how to use this
hurt or killed. lockable retractor.) feature (see page 80 ).
Never put a seat belt over yourself Do not leave children alone in a Keep vehicle keys and remote
and a child. During a crash, the vehicle. Leaving children without transmitters out of the reach of
belt could press deep into the child adult supervision is illegal in most children. Even very young
and cause serious or fatal injuries. states and Canadian provinces, children learn how to unlock
and can be very hazardous. vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
Never let two children use the switch, and open the trunk, which
same seat belt. If they do, they For example, infants and small can lead to accidental injury or
could be very seriously injured in a children left in a vehicle on a hot death.
crash. day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
Use the childproof door locks to ignition switch can accidentally set
prevent children from opening the the vehicle in motion, possibly
rear doors. This can prevent injuring themselves or others.
children from accidentally falling
out (see page 81 ).

０７／０８／０７１７：５２：０７３１ＳＮＣ６２０００４４
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed
or a convertible seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back
facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a

rear-facing child seat in the front
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in seat.
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be If the passenger’s front airbag
very seriously injured during a inflates, it can hit the back of the
frontal collision. child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-

facing child seat may prevent the
Child Seat Type driver or a front passenger from
An infant must be properly moving their seat as far back as
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining recommended, or from locking their
child seat until the child reaches the seat-back in the desired position.
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least It could also interfere with proper
one year old. operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１７：５２：１７３１ＳＮＣ６２０００４５
Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any of these situations, we Protecting Small Children We also recommend that a small
strongly recommend that you install child use the child seat until the child
the child seat directly behind the reaches the weight or height limit
front passenger’s seat, move the seat for the seat.
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get Child Seat Placement
a smaller rear-facing child seat. We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Placing a rear-facing child seat Placing a forward-facing child seat in

in the front seat can result in the front seat of a vehicle equipped
serious injury or death during a with a passenger’s airbag can be
collision. hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
Child Seat Type far forward, or the child’s head is
Always place a rear-facing child A child who is at least one year old, thrown forward during a collision, an
seat in the back seat, not the and who fits within the child seat inflating airbag can strike the child
front. maker’s weight and height limits, with enough force to cause very
should be restrained in a forward- serious or fatal injuries.
facing, upright child seat.
Even with advanced front airbags
Of the different seats available, we that automatically turn the
recommend those that have a five- passenger’s front airbag off (see
point harness system as shown. page 31 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.

０７／０８／０７１７：５２：２６３１ＳＮＣ６２０００４６
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
If it is necessary to put a forward- Selecting a Child Seat In seating positions and vehicles not
facing child seat in the front, move When buying a child seat, you need equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as to choose either a conventional child compatible child seat can be installed
possible, and be sure the child seat is seat, or one designed for use with using a seat belt.

firmly secured to the vehicle and the the lower anchors and tethers for
child is properly strapped in the seat. children (LATCH) system. Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
Conventional child seats must be seat should meet three
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, requirements:
Placing a forward-facing child whereas LATCH-compatible seats
seat in the front seat can result are secured by attaching the seat to 1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
in serious injury or death if the hardware built into the two outer Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
front airbag inflates. seating positions in the back seat. Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
If you must place a forward- Since LATCH-compatible child seats
facing child seat in front, move are easier to install and reduce the 2. The child seat should be of the
the vehicle seat as far back as possibility of improper installation, proper type and size to fit the child.
possible, and properly restrain we recommend selecting this style. Rear-facing for infants, forward-
the child. facing for small children.
3. The child seat should fit the

vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１７：５２：３４３１ＳＮＣ６２０００４７
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
Before purchasing a conventional Installing a Child Seat movement can be expected and
child seat, or using a previously After selecting a proper child seat should not reduce the child seat’s
purchased one, we recommend that and a good place to install the seat, effectiveness.
you test the seat in the specific there are three main steps in
vehicle seating position or positions installing the seat: If the child seat is not secure, try
where the seat will be used. installing it in a different seating
1. Properly secure the child seat to position, or use a different style of
the vehicle. All child seats must be child seat that can be firmly secured.
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with 3. Secure the child in the child seat.
the LATCH (lower anchors and Make sure the child is properly
tethers for children) system. A strapped in the child seat
child whose seat is not properly according to the child seat maker’s
secured to the vehicle can be instructions. A child who is not
endangered in a crash. properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child The following pages provide
seat, push and pull the seat guidelines on how to properly install
forward and from side-to-side to a child seat. A forward-facing child
verify that it is secure. seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for a rear-
A child seat secured with a seat belt facing child seat.
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

０７／０８／０７１７：５２：４４３１ＳＮＣ６２０００４８
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with BUTTON

LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers

for children) at the outer rear seats.
The lower anchors are located

between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
LOWER ANCHORS Rigid type
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the To install a LATCH-compatible child 3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
anchor point. seat: seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
1. Move the seat belt buckle or child seat maker’s instructions.
tongue away from the lower
anchors. Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
2. Make sure there are no objects shown above.
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１７：５２：５２３１ＳＮＣ６２０００４９
If the tether strap is too long and

Front
cannot be tightened firmly, find a
route where the strap can be
tightened securely.
7. Attach the tether strap hook to the

tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
ANCHOR seat maker.
8. Push and pull the child seat

Flexible type TETHER STRAP HOOK forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
Other LATCH-compatible seats have 5. Lift the head restraint (see page
a flexible-type connector as shown 91 ), then route the tether strap
above. through the legs of the head
restraint and over the seat-back,
4. Whatever type you have, follow making sure the strap is not
the child seat maker’s instructions twisted.
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
6. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.

０７／０８／０７１７：５３：００３１ＳＮＣ６２０００５０
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the

vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in

all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor,
seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the
through the child seat according belt all the way out until it stops,
to the seat maker’s instructions, then let the belt feed back into the
then insert the latch plate into the retractor.
buckle.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１７：５３：０９３１ＳＮＣ６２０００５１
Installing a Child Seat with a

Tether
ANCHORAGE POINTS
COVER
4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat ANCHOR
locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side-to-side to
the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is secure enough to A child seat with a tether can be
up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving installed in any seating position in
lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not the back seat, using one of the
the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to anchorage points shown above.
the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these
steps. Since a tether can provide additional
To remove slack, it may help to security to the lap/shoulder belt
put weight on the child seat, or To deactivate the lockable retractor installation, we recommend using a
push on the back of the seat while and remove a child seat, unlatch the tether whenever one is required or
pulling up on the belt. buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let available.
the belt fully retract.

０７／０８／０７１７：５３：１６３１ＳＮＣ６２０００５２
Outer Position Center Position Front

Front

ANCHOR ANCHOR
TETHER STRAP HOOK TETHER STRAP HOOK
1. After properly securing the child 2. Lift the anchor cover, then attach
seat (see page 45 ), lift the head the tether strap hook to the
restraint, then route the tether anchor, making sure the strap is
strap over the seat-back and not twisted.
through the head restraint legs.
3. Tighten the strap according to the
If the tether strap is too long and seat maker’s instructions.
cannot be tightened firmly, find a
route where the strap can be
tightened securely.

０７／０８／０７１７：５３：２２３１ＳＮＣ６２０００５３
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under
child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder or death if the passenger’s front
belt. airbag inflates.
The following pages give If a child must ride in front,

instructions on how to check proper move the vehicle seat as far
seat belt fit, what kind of booster back as possible, use a booster
seat to use if one is needed, and seat if needed, have the child
important precautions for a child sit up properly and wear the
who must sit in front. seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back

against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend

comfortably over the edge of the
seat?

０７／０８／０７１７：５３：３１３１ＳＮＣ６２０００５４
3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat to drive.

between the child’s neck and arm?
Booster seats can be high-back or
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as low-back. Whichever style you select,

possible, touching the child’s make sure the booster seat meets
thighs? federal safety standards (see page
41 ) and that you follow the booster
5. Will the child be able to stay seat maker’s instructions.
seated like this for the whole trip?
If a child who uses a booster seat
If you answer yes to all these must ride in front, move the vehicle
questions, the child is ready to wear seat as far back as possible, and be
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If sure the child is wearing the seat
you answer no to any question, the belt properly.
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a A child may continue using a booster
back seat and use a booster seat seat until the tops of their ears are
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them even with the top of the vehicle’s or
properly without the booster. booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
Some states and Canadian provinces the lap/shoulder belt without a
also require children to use a booster booster seat.
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend

０７／０８／０７１７：５３：４１３１ＳＮＣ６２０００５５
When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And If you decide that a child can safely
Front while age may be one indicator of ride up front, be sure to:
The National Highway Traffic Safety when a child can safely ride in front,
Administration and Transport there are other important factors you Carefully read the owner’s manual,
Canada recommend that all children should consider. and make sure you understand all
age 12 and under be properly seat belt instructions and all safety
restrained in a back seat. Physical Size information.
Physically, a child must be large
If the passenger’s front airbag enough for the lap/shoulder belt to Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
inflates in a moderate to severe properly fit (see pages 14 and 48 ). If most position.
frontal collision, the airbag can cause the seat belt does not fit properly,
serious injuries to a child who is with or without the child sitting on a Have the child sit up straight, back
unrestrained, improperly restrained, booster seat, the child should not sit against the seat, and feet on or
sitting too close to the airbag, or out in front. near the floor.
of position.
Maturity Check that the child’s seat belt is
A side airbag also poses risks. If any To safely ride in front, a child must properly and securely positioned.
part of a larger child’s body is in the be able to follow the rules, including
path of a deploying side airbag, the sitting properly, and wearing the seat Supervise the child. Even mature
child could receive possibly serious belt properly throughout a ride. children sometimes need to be
injuries. reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.

０７／０８／０７１７：５３：４７３１ＳＮＣ６２０００５６
Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a

Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a child’s comfort or
in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a

crash. seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
Do not let a child put the shoulder of serious injury in a crash.
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Two children should never use the

same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.

０７／０８／０７１７：５３：５５３１ＳＮＣ６２０００５７
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains With the trunk open, airflow can pull
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
monoxide should not enter the Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
vehicle in normal driving if you Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the
maintain your vehicle properly and unconsciousness and even kill trunk open, open all the windows,
follow the information on this page. you. and set the heating and cooling
system as shown below.
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to If you must sit in your parked vehicle
carbon monoxide. with the engine running, even in an
The vehicle is raised for an oil unconfined area, adjust the heating
change. and cooling system as follows:
High levels of carbon monoxide can
You notice a change in the sound collect rapidly in enclosed areas, 1. Select the fresh air mode.
of the exhaust. such as a garage. Do not run the 2. Select the mode.
engine with the garage door closed. 3. Set the fan speed to high.
The vehicle was in an accident Even with the door open, run the 4. Set the temperature control to a
that may have damaged the engine only long enough to move the comfortable setting.
underside. vehicle out of the garage.

０７／０８／０７１７：５４：０９３１ＳＮＣ６２０００５８
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations DASHBOARD SUN VISORS

shown. They warn you of potential U.S. models only U.S. models
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels

carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard

to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label, which is removed
by the owner), contact your dealer
for a replacement.
Canadian models
RADIATOR CAP

０７／０８／０７１７：５４：３４３１ＳＮＣ６２０００５９
Safety Labels
HOOD HOOD DOORJAMBS

U.S. models U.S. models U.S. models Canadian models
Canadian models
Canadian models

０７／０８／０７１７：５４：３８３１ＳＮＣ６２０００６０
Main Menu
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Control Locations ............................ 56 Keys and Locks ................................ 77
the controls and displays that Instrument Panel ............................. 57 Immobilizer System......................... 78
contribute to the daily operation of Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 58 Ignition Switch ................................. 79
your vehicle. All the essential Gauges .............................................. 64 Door Locks ....................................... 80
controls are within easy reach. Odometer ...................................... 64 Power Door Locks ....................... 80
Display Change Button ............... 65 Childproof Door Locks ............... 81

Current Fuel Mileage .................. 65 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.. 81
Temperature Gauge .................... 65 Auto Door Locking ...................... 81
Trip Meter .................................... 66 Auto Door Unlocking .................. 84
Average Fuel Mileage ................. 66 Trunk................................................. 87
Fuel Gauge ................................... 66 Emergency Trunk Opener ......... 87
Outside Temperature Remote Transmitter ........................ 88
Indicator .................................... 67 Seats .................................................. 90
Check Fuel Cap Message ........... 68 Power Windows ............................... 94
Maintenance Minder ................... 68 Mirrors .............................................. 95
IMA Battery Level Gauge .......... 69 Parking Brake .................................. 97
Charge/Assist Gauge ................. 70 Interior Convenience Items ............ 98
Controls Near the Steering Beverage Holder .......................... 99
Wheel ............................................ 71 Accessory Power Socket ............ 99
Windshield Wipers and Washers .. 72 Glove Box ..................................... 99
Turn Signal and Headlights............ 73 Console Compartment ................ 99
Daytime Running Lights............. 74 Interior Lights ................................ 100
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 74
Hazard Warning Button .................. 75
Rear Window Defogger .................. 75
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........... 76

０７／０８／０７１７：５４：４４３１ＳＮＣ６２０００６１
Control Locations
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P. 58) AUDIO SYSTEM (P. 108)

GAUGES (P. 64)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P. 102)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P. 96)
POWER DOOR LOCK DOOR LOCK TAB

MASTER SWITCH (P. 80)
(P. 80)
POWER WINDOW ACCESSORY POWER

SWITCHES SOCKET (P. 99)
(P. 94)
FUEL FILL DOOR

RELEASE HANDLE
(P. 175)
TRUNK RELEASE
HANDLE
(P. 87)
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (CVT)
(P. 167) (P. 192)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown

０７／０８／０７１７：５４：５４３１ＳＮＣ６２０００６２
Instrument Panel
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P. 61) DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR
(P. 62) (P. 60)
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (AMBER)
(P. 63)

ELECTRIC POWER
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS HIGH BEAM LIGHTS ON TRUNK-OPEN STEERING (EPS)
INDICATOR (P. 60) INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR (P. 63)
(P. 60) (P. 60) (P. 60) PARKING BRAKE AND
LOW OIL PRESSURE BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P. 62, 253) INDICATOR (RED)
(P. 58, 256)
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P. 62, 254) MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR (P. 61)
CRUISE MAIN
INDICATOR (P. 61) SEAT BELT REMINDER
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P. 18, 58)
INDICATOR (P. 61) ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(ABS) INDICATOR (P. 59)
IMA SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P. 62) IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM LOW TIRE PRESSURE
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR INDICATOR (P. 59) INDICATOR＊1 (P. 60)
LAMP (P. 62, 255) SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SIDE AIRBAG OFF
AUTO IDLE STOP INDICATOR SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 30, 58) INDICATOR (P. 30, 59)
(P. 62, 196, 197) TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) INDICATOR＊1 (P. 61)
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
＊1 : If equipped
０７／０８／０７１７：５５：０３３１ＳＮＣ６２０００６３
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many If either of you do not fasten your 2. If it stays on after you have fully
indicators to give you important seat belt while driving, the beeper released the parking brake while
information about your vehicle. will sound and the indicator will flash the engine is running, or if it
again at regular intervals. For more comes on while driving, there
Seat Belt Reminder information, see page 18 . could be a problem with the brake
Indicator system. For more information, see
This indicator reminds you and your U.S. Canada Parking Brake page 256 .
passengers to fasten your seat belts. and Brake
System Supplemental Restraint
If you turn the ignition switch to the Indicator (Red) System Indicator
ON (II) position before fastening This indicator has two functions: This indicator comes on for several
your seat belt, the beeper sounds seconds when you turn the ignition
and the indicator flashes. If you do 1. It comes on when you turn the switch to the ON (II) position. If it
not fasten your seat belt before the ignition switch to the ON (II) comes on at any other time, it
beeper stops, the indicator stops position. It is a reminder to check indicates a potential problem with
flashing but remains on. the parking brake. A beeper your front airbags. This indicator will
sounds if you drive with the also alert you to a potential problem
If your front passenger does not parking brake not fully released. with your side airbags, passenger’s
fasten their seat belt, the indicator Driving with the parking brake not side airbag automatic cutoff system,
comes on about 6 seconds after the fully released can damage the side curtain airbags, automatic seat
ignition switch is turned to the ON brakes and tires. belt tensioners, driver’s seat position
(II) position. sensor, or the front passenger’s
weight sensors. For more
information, see page 30 .

０７／０８／０７１７：５５：１２３１ＳＮＣ６２０００６４
U.S. Canada Side Airbag Off Immobilizer System Turn Signal and
Indicator Indicator Hazard Warning
This indicator comes on briefly when Indicators
This indicator comes on for several you turn the ignition switch to the The left or right turn signal indicator
seconds when you turn the ignition ON (II) position. It will then go off if blinks when you signal a lane change
switch to the ON (II) position. If it you have inserted a properly-coded or turn. If an indicator does not blink

comes on at any other time, it ignition key. If it is not a properly- or blinks rapidly, it usually means
indicates that the passenger’s side coded key, the indicator will blink, one of the turn signal bulbs is
airbag has automatically shut off. and the engine’s fuel system will be burned out (see pages 225 and 226 ).
For more information, see page 30 . disabled (see page 78 ). Replace the bulb as soon as possible,
since other drivers cannot see that
Anti-lock Brake System you are signaling.
(ABS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for When you press the hazard warning
a few seconds when you turn the button, both turn signal indicators
ignition switch to the ON (II) and all turn signals on the outside of
position. If it comes on at any other the vehicle flash.
time, there is a problem with the
ABS. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked at a dealer. With
this indicator on, your vehicle still
has normal braking ability but no
anti-lock function. For more
information, see page 200 .

０７／０８／０７１７：５５：２２３１ＳＮＣ６２０００６５
‘‘Daytime Running Lights On Indicator Low Tire Pressure

Lights’’ Indicator Indicator
If this indicator comes on when the This indicator reminds you that the U.S. models only
ignition switch is turned to the ON exterior lights are on. It comes on This indicator normally comes on for
(II) position and the parking brake is when the light switch is in either the a few seconds when you turn the
released, it means there is a problem or position. If you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II)
in the circuit. Have your vehicle ignition switch to the ACCESSORY position.
checked by your dealer. (I) or the LOCK (0) position without If it comes on while driving, it
turning off the light switch, this indicates that one or more of your
High Beam Indicator indicator will remain on. A reminder vehicle’s tires are significantly low
chime will also sound when you open on pressure.
This indicator comes on with the the driver’s door and remove the key
high beam headlights. For more from the ignition switch. If this happens, pull to the side of the
information, see page 73 . road when it is safe, check which tire
Trunk-open Indicator has lost the pressure, and determine
This indicator also comes on with the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
reduced brightness when the This indicator comes on if the trunk replace the flat tire with the compact
daytime running lights (DRL) are on lid is not closed tightly. spare (see page 243 ), and have the
(see page 74 ). flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
Door-open Indicator If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
This indicator comes on if any door (see page 263 ). For more
is not closed tightly. information, see page 242 .

０７／０８／０７１７：５５：３５３１ＳＮＣ６２０００６６
Tire Pressure Monitoring Cruise Main Indicator Low Fuel Indicator

System (TPMS) Indicator
U.S. models only This indicator comes on when you This indicator comes on as a
This indicator normally comes on for turn on the cruise control system by reminder that you must refuel soon.
a few seconds when you turn the pressing the CRUISE button (see
ignition switch to the ON (II) page 170 ). When the indicator comes on, there

position. is about 0.9 US gal (3.5 ) of fuel
Cruise Control Indicator remaining in the tank before the
If this indicator comes on and stays reading reaches E. There is a small
on at any other time, or if it does not This indicator comes on when you reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
come on when you turn the ignition set the cruise control. See page when the reading does reach E.
switch to the ON (II) position, there 170 for information on operating the
is a problem with the TPMS. With cruise control. Maintenance Minder
this indicator on, the low tire Indicator
pressure indicator will not come on Washer Level Indicator This indicator reminds you that it is
when a tire loses pressure. Take the time to take your vehicle in for
vehicle to your dealer to have the Canadian models only scheduled maintenance. The
system checked. This indicator comes on when the maintenance main items and sub
washer fluid level is low. Add washer items will be displayed in the
fluid when you see this indicator information display. See page 207 for
come on (see page 220 ). more information on the
maintenance minder.
This indicator goes off when your

dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.

０７／０８／０７１７：５５：４７３１ＳＮＣ６２０００６７
Security System Indicator Malfunction Indicator IMA System Indicator

Lamp
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR See page 255 . This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
Low Oil Pressure ignition switch to the ON (II)
Indicator position. If it comes on at any other
The engine can be severely damaged time, it indicates a problem in the
if this indicator flashes or stays on integrated motor assist (IMA)
when the engine is running. For system. With the IMA indicator on,
more information, see page 253 . the vehicle may not accelerate as it
normally does. Have the vehicle
Charging System checked by the dealer as soon as
Indicator possible.
If this indicator comes on when the
This indicator comes on when the engine is running, the battery is not Auto Idle Stop Indicator
security system is set. For more being charged. For more information,
information, see page 169 . see page 254 . See pages 196 and 197 .

０７／０８／０７１７：５５：５４３１ＳＮＣ６２０００６８
Electric Power Steering If you turn the steering wheel to the U.S. Canada Brake System
(EPS) Indicator full left or right position repeatedly Indicator
This indicator normally comes on while stopping or driving at very low (Amber)
when you turn the ignition switch to speed, you may feel slightly harder This indicator normally comes on for
the ON (II) position and goes off steering due to overheating of the a few seconds when you turn the
after the engine starts. If it comes on steering gearbox. ignition switch to the ON (II)

at any other time, there is a problem position. When the brake system
in the electric power steering system. Continuously driving under those indicator (amber) is on, there is the
If this happens, stop the vehicle in a conditions could damage the power problem with the Cooperative
safe place, and turn off the engine. steering system. Control with regenerative brake,
Reset the system by restarting the Creep Aid System or Brake Assist
engine. The indicator will not turn (the normal brake operates properly).
off immediately. If it does not go off Have your vehicle checked by your
after driving a short distance, or dealer.
comes back on again while driving, For more information, see page 199 .
take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. With the indicator
on, the EPS may be off, making the
vehicle harder to steer.

０７／０８／０７１７：５６：０１３１ＳＮＣ６２０００６９
Gauges
CURRENT FUEL MILEAGE/ SPEEDOMETER To switch the information display

TEMPERATURE GAUGE between the odometer, trip meter,
outside temperature, and engine oil
life and maintenance item code(s),
FUEL GAUGE press the SEL/RESET button
repeatedly.
TACHOMETER Odometer
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures in miles or
kilometers. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
INFORMATION alter the odometer with the intent to
DISPLAY change the number of miles or
TRIP METER
kilometers indicated.
ODOMETER/OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
SEL/RESET BUTTON DISPLAY CHANGE BUTTON
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS CONTROL BUTTONS

０７／０８／０７１７：５６：０９３１ＳＮＣ６２０００７０
Gauges
Display Change Button Current Fuel Mileage Temperature Gauge

Every time you press the display This shows the temperature of the
change button, the display changes engine’s coolant. During normal
from the current fuel mileage to the operation, the reading should be in
temperature gauge, or from the the middle of the gauge. In severe
temperature gauge to the current driving conditions, such as very hot

fuel mileage. weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the reading may reach near
Press and hold the display change the red mark. If it reaches the red
button until you hear a beep. Each (Hot) mark, pull safely to the side of
time you press the button, the the road. See page 251 for
speedometer, trip meter, average instructions and precautions on
fuel mileage and current fuel checking the engine’s cooling
mileage readings switches their system.
measures. This display shows the current, or
instant fuel mileage you are getting.
Depending on the selected measures
(mph or km/h), the trip meter and It shows the number of mpg or l/100
odometer readings are shown with km.
miles or km. The average fuel
mileage and current fuel mileage are
shown with mpg or l/100 km.

０７／０８／０７１７：５６：１７３１ＳＮＣ６２０００７１
Gauges
Trip Meter Average Fuel Mileage Fuel Gauge

This meter shows the number of When either of the trip meters (trip This shows how much fuel you have.
miles or kilometers driven since you A or trip B) is displayed, your It may show slightly more or less
last reset it. vehicle’s average fuel mileage since than the actual amount.
you last reset that trip meter can be
There are two trip meters: TRIP A shown on the information display
and TRIP B. Switch between these (mpg or l/100km). This number is
displays by pressing the SEL/ updated once per 10 seconds. To see Avoid driving with an extremely low
RESET button repeatedly. the average fuel mileage, press and f uel level. Running out of f uel could
release the SEL/RESET button cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
Each trip meter works independently, repeatedly. the catalytic converter.
so you can keep track of two
different distances. The average fuel mileage will be
reset when you reset the trip meter,
To reset a trip meter, display it, and or if the vehicle’s battery goes dead
then press and hold the SEL/RESET or is disconnected.
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0.’’

０７／０８／０７１７：５６：２５３１ＳＮＣ６２０００７２
Gauges
Outside Temperature Indicator The temperature sensor is in the If the outside temperature is
This indicator displays the outside front bumper. Therefore, the incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S. temperature reading can be affected it up to ±5°F (±3°C) warmer or
models) or Centigrade (Canadian by heat reflection from the road cooler.
models). To see the outside surface, engine heat, and the
temperature, press and release the exhaust from surrounding traffic. NOTE: The temperature must be

SEL/RESET button until the This can cause an incorrect stabilized before doing this
temperature is shown on the temperature reading when your procedure.
information display. speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
Select the outside temperature
The sensor delays the display update display, then press and hold the
until it reaches the correct outside SEL/RESET button for 10 seconds.
temperature. This may take several The following sequence will appear
minutes. for 1 second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, −5,
−4, −3, −2, −1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2,
3, −3, −2, −1, 0 (Canada).
When it reaches the desired value,

release the SEL/RESET button. You
should see the new outside
temperature displayed.
In certain weather conditions,

temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.

０７／０８／０７１７：５６：３０３１ＳＮＣ６２０００７３
Gauges
Check Fuel Cap Message If the system still detects a leak in Maintenance Minder
Your vehicle’s onboard diagnostic the vehicle’s evaporative emissions The information display in the
system will detect a loose or missing system, the malfunction indicator instrument panel shows you the
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill engine oil life and maintenance
leak. The first time a leak is detected cap was not already tightened, turn service items when the ignition
a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message the engine off, and check or switch is in the ON (II) position. This
appears on the information display. retighten the fuel fill cap until it information helps to keep you aware
Turn the engine off, and confirm the clicks at least once. The MIL should of the periodic maintenance your
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen go off after several days of normal vehicle needs for continued trouble-
it, then retighten it until it clicks at driving once the cap is tightened or free driving. Refer to page 207 for
least once. The message should go replaced. If the MIL does not go off, more information.
off after several days of normal have your vehicle inspected by a
driving once you tighten or replace dealer. For more information, see
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another page 255 .
display, press the SEL/RESET
button. The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’
message will appear each time you
restart the engine until the system
turns the message off.

０７／０８／０７１７：５６：３８３１ＳＮＣ６２０００７４
Gauges
IMA Battery Level Gauge acceleration or climbing a long hill. This correction of the battery level
The IMA motor will recharge the gauge is normal and does not
BATTERY LEVEL GAUGE battery as you continue driving. indicate a problem. If the IMA
battery develops a problem or
If the battery is mostly discharged, becomes deteriorated, the IMA
the Auto Idle Stop function is system indicator will come on. If this

disabled (see page 196 ). happens, have the vehicle checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
The battery level gauge does not
read the battery level directly. It
calculates the level by continuously
measuring the current flow, voltage,
and temperature.
This gauge shows you the state of Since the level is not read directly,
charge of the battery for the small sensing errors can, over time,
Integrated Motor Assist (IMA). This cause the gauge to read higher than
battery is recharged by the IMA the actual battery level. The system
motor, and discharged by the IMA will then perform a correction, and
when it is assisting the engine with the battery level gauge reading will
powering the vehicle. drop suddenly. When this happens,
IMA assist and Auto Idle Stop are
The gauge reading may drop near disabled until the IMA battery is
the bottom under driving conditions sufficiently recharged by normal
that require IMA motor assistance driving. This should take only a few
for a long time, such as prolonged minutes.

０７／０８／０７１７：５６：４３３１ＳＮＣ６２０００７５
Gauges
Charge/Assist Gauge If the IMA battery is too hot or too

cold, the IMA system limits the IMA
IMA ASSIST GAUGE battery’s output power to protect the
battery. This disables the IMA assist
and Auto Idle Stop, even though the
Battery Level Gauge may show that
the battery is well-charged.
Therefore, if the motor assist is
frequently used, the battery
becomes hot and starts to limit its
output power.
IMA CHARGE GAUGE It takes the IMA system a few

minutes in cold weather to normalize
This gauge shows you the status of the IMA battery’s output power, and
the Integrated Motor Assist (IMA). about 15 minutes in hot weather.
When the IMA battery is being
charged, the bottom side of the
gauge illuminates. When the IMA is
assisting the engine, the upper side
of the gauge illuminates.

０７／０８／０７１７：５６：５０３１ＳＮＣ６２０００７６
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS HEADLIGHTS/TURN WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

(P. 74) SIGNAL (P. 72)
(P. 73)
DISPLAY CHANGE BUTTON
(P. 65)

PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P. 31)
SEL/RESET BUTTON
(P. 64)
HAZARD WARNING
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS BUTTON
(P. 167) (P. 75)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
VOICE CONTROL (P. 75)
SWITCHES＊3 HEATED MIRRORS＊2
HORN＊1 (P. 96)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P. 176)
STEERING WHEEL CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS

ADJUSTMENT (P. 76) (P. 170)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
＊1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
＊2 : Canadian model only
＊3 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
０７／０８／０７１７：５７：００３１ＳＮＣ６２０００７７
Windshield Wipers and Washers
MIST − The wipers run at high LO − The wipers run at low speed.
speed until you release the
lever. HI − The wipers run at high speed.
OFF − The wipers are not activated. Windshield Washers − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you,
INT − The length of the wiper and hold it. The washers spray
interval is varied until you release the lever. The
automatically according to wipers run at low speed, then
the vehicle’s speed. complete one more sweep after
you release the lever.
ADJUSTMENT RING Vary the delay by turning the
adjustment ring. If you turn it to
1. MIST the shortest delay
2. OFF ( position), the wipers
3. INT − Intermittent change to low speed operation
4. LO − Low speed when the vehicle speed exceeds 12
5. HI − High speed mph (20 km/h).
6. Windshield washers
While the vehicle is stopped and in
Push the right lever up or down to gear, the wipers sweep the
select a position. windshield whenever you remove
your foot from the brake pedal.

０７／０８／０７１７：５７：０７３１ＳＮＣ６２０００７８
Turn Signals and Headlights
Turn Signal − Push down on the If you leave the lights on with the
lever to signal a left turn and up to key removed from the ignition
signal a right turn. To signal a lane switch, you will hear a reminder
change, push lightly on the lever, chime when you open the driver’s
and hold it. The lever will return to door.
center when you release it or

complete a turn. High Beams − Push the lever
forward and the high beam indicator
Headlights − Turning the switch to will come on (see page 60 ). Pull it
the ‘‘ ’’ position turns on the back to return to low beams.
parking lights, taillights, instrument
panel lights, side-marker lights, and To flash the high beams, pull the
rear license plate lights. lever back lightly, then release it.
1. Turn signal The high beams will stay on as long
2. Off Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’ as you hold the lever back.
3. Parking and interior lights position turns on the headlights.
4. Headlights
5. High beams When the light switch is in the
6. Flash high beams ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder. This indicator stays on if
you leave the light switch on and
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position.

０７／０８／０７１７：５７：１６３１ＳＮＣ６２０００７９
Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness
Daytime Running Lights Instrument Panel Brightness when you reach the maximum or
With the headlight switch off or minimum brightness. The display
position, the high beam INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS returns to the odometer 5 seconds
headlights come on with reduced CONTROL BUTTONS after you stop adjusting the
brightness when you turn the brightness.
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking To reduce glare at night, the
brake. They remain on until you turn instrument panel illumination dims
the ignition switch off, even if you when you turn the light switch to the
set the parking brake. or position.
The headlights revert to normal The center of each meter (upper and
operation when you turn them on lower) illuminates with reduced
with the switch. brightness when you unlock and
The buttons under the left side vent open the driver’s door, and then goes
control the brightness of the back to the selected brightness when
instrument panel. Push the ＋ or − you turn the ignition switch to the
button to adjust the brightness. ON (II) position.
Separate adjustments can be made If you insert the key but do not turn
when the headlights are on and off. the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, the illumination turns off in
There are six brightness levels. about 10 seconds.
When you push either button, the
information display indicates the
current level. You will hear a tone

０７／０８／０７１７：５７：２４３１ＳＮＣ６２０００８０
Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger wires on the inside of

the rear window can be accidentally

U.S. model damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.
On Canadian models
Pushing this button also turns the
Canadian mirror heaters on or off. For more
model information, see page 96 .
Push the button to turn on the The rear window defogger will clear
hazard warning lights (four-way fog, frost, and thin ice from the
flashers). This causes all four window. Push the defogger button to
outside turn signals and both turn turn it on and off. The indicator in
indicators in the instrument panel to the button comes on to show the
flash. Use the hazard warning lights defogger is on. If you do not turn it
if you need to park in a dangerous off, the defogger will shut itself off
area near heavy traffic, or if your after about 15 minutes. It also shuts
vehicle is disabled. off when you turn off the ignition
switch. You have to turn the
defogger on again when you restart
the vehicle.

０７／０８／０７１７：５７：３０３１ＳＮＣ６２０００８１
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Make any steering wheel adjustment 3. Push the lever up to lock the
before you start driving. steering wheel in that position.
4. Make sure you have securely

locked the steering wheel in place
Adjusting the steering wheel by trying to move it up, down, in,
position while driving may and out.
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only

when the vehicle is stopped.
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or

down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.

０７／０８／０７１７：５７：３８３１ＳＮＣ６２０００８２
Keys and Locks
You should have received a key Protect the keys from direct
KEY MASTER KEYS VALET
NUMBER WITH REMOTE KEY number tag with your set of keys. sunlight, high temperature, and
TAG TRANSMITTER (Gray) You will need this key number if you high humidity.
ever have to get a key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks. Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.

These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the Keep the keys away from liquids.
immobilizer system. They will not If they get wet, dry them
work to start the engine if the immediately with a soft cloth.
circuits are damaged.
The keys without a remote
transmitter do not contain batteries.
The master key fits all the locks on Do not try to take them apart.
your vehicle.
The valet key works only in the

ignition and the door locks. You can
keep the trunk and trunk release
handle locked when you leave your
vehicle and the valet key at a parking
facility.

０７／０８／０７１７：５７：４６３１ＳＮＣ６２０００８３
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects If the system repeatedly does not As required by the FCC:
your vehicle from theft. If an recognize the coding of your key, This device complies with Part 15 of the
improperly-coded key (or other contact your dealer. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
device) is used, the engine’s fuel following two conditions: (1) This device
system is disabled. Do not attempt to alter this system may not cause harmful interference, and
or add other devices to it. Electrical (2) this device must accept any
When you turn the ignition switch to problems could result that may make interference received, including
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer your vehicle undrivable. interference that may cause undesired
system indicator should come on operation.
briefly, then go off. If the indicator If you have lost your key and cannot
starts to blink, it means the system start your engine, contact your Changes or modifications not expressly
does not recognize the coding of the dealer. approved by the party responsible for
key. Turn the ignition switch to the compliance could void the user’s
LOCK (0) position, remove the key, authority to operate the equipment.
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again. Always take the ignition key with you This device complies with Industry
whenever you leave the vehicle alone. Canada Standard RSS-210.
The system may not recognize your Operation is subject to the following two
key’s coding if another immobilizer conditions: (1) this device may not cause
key or other metal object (i.e. key interference, and (2) this device must
fob) is near the ignition switch when accept any interference that may cause
you insert the key. undesired operation of the device.

０７／０８／０７１７：５７：５４３１ＳＮＣ６２０００８４
Ignition Switch
If the front wheels are turned, the You will hear a reminder beeper if
anti-theft lock may make it difficult you leave the key in the LOCK (0) or
to turn the key. Firmly turn the the ACCESSORY (I) position and
steering wheel to the left or right as open the driver’s door. Remove the
you turn the key. key to turn off the beeper.

ACCESSORY (I) − You can The shift lever must be in Park
operate the audio system and the before you can remove the key from
accessory power sockets in this the ignition switch.
position.
ON (II) − This is the normal key

position when driving. Several of the
The ignition switch has four indicators on the instrument panel
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY come on as a test when you turn the
(I), ON (II), and START (III). ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
LOCK (0) − You can insert or position.
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, the shift lever must START (III) − Use this position
be in Park, and you must push the only to start the engine. The switch
key in slightly. returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.

０７／０８／０７１７：５８：０２３１ＳＮＣ６２０００８５
Door Locks
Power Door Locks To lock any door when getting out of

the vehicle, pull the lock tab out, and
LOCK TAB close the door.
To lock the doors when getting out

To lock of the vehicle, remove the key from
the ignition switch, and push the top
To lock of the master door lock switch, then
close the door.
To unlock
Lockout Prevention
To unlock With any door open and the key in
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
the ignition, both master door lock
switches and driver’s door lock tab
Each front door has a master door Each door has a lock tab next to the are disabled. They are not disabled
lock switch. Either switch locks and inside door handle. Pull out the tab when all the doors are closed, or
unlocks all doors. Push the top of the to lock the door, and push it in to when the key is not in the ignition.
switch to lock all doors; push the unlock.
bottom to unlock them.
The lock tab on each door locks and
unlocks that door. Pulling out on the
driver’s door lock tab locks all doors.
To unlock the driver’s door from the
outside, turn the key and release it.
If you turn it again, all the doors
unlock.

０７／０８／０７１７：５８：１１３１ＳＮＣ６２０００８６
Door Locks
Childproof Door Locks Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Auto Door Locking

Your vehicle has customizable The auto door locking feature has
Unlock
LEVER settings for the doors to three possible settings:
automatically lock and unlock. There
are default settings for each of these The auto door locking is
features. You can turn off or change deactivated all the time.

the settings for these features as
described on the following pages. The doors lock whenever you
Lock When you customize the setting, move the shift lever out of the
make sure your vehicle is parked Park (P) position.
safely, the engine is off, and apply
the parking brake. Make all settings The doors lock when the vehicle
before you start driving. speed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h).
This is the default setting.
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, push the lock
tab in, and use the outside door
handle.

０７／０８／０７１７：５８：２０３１ＳＮＣ６２０００８７
Door Locks
To turn off the Auto Door Lock 3. Push and hold the front of the To program the Park Lock mode:
modes: master door lock switch on the Locks all doors when the shift lever is
driver’s door until you hear a click moved out of the Park (P) position.
(after about 5 seconds).
4. Release the switch, and within 5

seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the

Park (P) position. 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
door. (II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.

０７／０８／０７１７：５８：３０３１ＳＮＣ６２０００８８
Door Locks
3. Push and hold the front of the To program the Drive Lock mode: 3. Push and hold the brake pedal,
master door lock switch on the Locks all doors when the vehicle’s speed and move the shift lever out of the
driver’s door. You will hear a click. reaches about 9 mph (15 km/h). Park (P) position.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5 4. Push and hold the front of the
seconds). master door lock switch on the

driver’s door. You will hear a click.
4. Release the switch, and within 5 Keep holding the switch until you
seconds, turn the ignition switch hear another click (after about 5
to the LOCK (0) position. seconds).
5. Release the switch and, within 5

to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
Move the shift lever to the Park
(P) position.
Park (P) position. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
(II) position, and make sure to
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１７：５８：４０３１ＳＮＣ６２０００８９
Door Locks
Auto Door Unlocking To turn off the Auto Door Unlock 3. Push and hold the rear of the
The auto door unlocking feature has modes: master door lock switch on the
five possible settings: driver’s door. You will hear a click,
and after about 5 seconds, you will
The auto door unlocking is hear another click.
deactivated all the time.
The driver’s door unlocks when seconds, turn the ignition switch
you move the shift lever to the to the LOCK (0) position.
Park (P) position.
This is the default setting.
All doors unlock when you move

the shift lever to the Park (P)
position.
The driver’s door unlocks Park (P) position.
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I) 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position. (II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
All doors unlock whenever you
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) position.

０７／０８／０７１７：５８：５２３１ＳＮＣ６２０００９０
Door Locks
To program the Park Unlock mode: 3. Push and hold the rear of the To program the Ignition Switch
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors master door lock switch on the Unlock mode:
when the shift lever is moved into the driver’s door. You will hear a click. Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
Park (P) position. Continue to hold down the switch: when the ignition switch is moved out of
the ON (II) position.
−Until you hear another click

(after about 5 seconds) to
activate driver’s door unlock
feature.
−Or, until you hear two more

clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate all doors unlock feature.

to the LOCK (0) position.
Park (P) position. 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
(II) position, and make sure to 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
close the driver’s door. (II) position, and make sure to
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１７：５８：５９３１ＳＮＣ６２０００９１
Door Locks
3. Push and hold the brake pedal, 5. Release the switch and, within 5 Even though your vehicle’s battery is
then move the shift lever out of seconds, turn the ignition switch removed or goes dead, the system
the Park (P) position. to the ACCESSORY (I) position. keeps the auto door lock/unlock
Move the shift lever to the Park setting which you selected.
4. Push and hold the rear of the (P) position.
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the
Continue to hold the switch: LOCK (0) position.
−Until you hear another click

(after about 5 seconds) to
activate driver’s door unlock
feature.
−Or, until you hear two more

clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate all doors unlock feature.

０７／０８／０７１７：５９：０７３１ＳＮＣ６２０００９２
Trunk
Press and hold the trunk release Emergency Trunk Opener

PULL button on the remote transmitter.
To close the trunk, press down on

the trunk lid.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging it,
and to prevent exhaust gas from
TRUNK RELEASE getting into the interior. See Carbon
HANDLE Monoxide Hazard, page 52 .
MASTER KEY
RELEASE LEVER
To open the trunk, pull the trunk
release handle on the left side of the As a safety feature, your vehicle has
driver’s seat. To protect items in the a release lever on the trunk latch so
trunk when you need to give the key the trunk can be opened from the
to someone else, lock the trunk inside. To open the trunk, push the
release handle with the master key, release lever to the left.
and give the other person the valet
key. Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature. For more information
about child safety, see page 38 .

０７／０８／０７１７：５９：１７３１ＳＮＣ６２０００９３
Remote Transmitter
PANIC BUTTON UNLOCK UNLOCK − Press this button once PANIC − Press this button for
BUTTON to unlock the driver’s door. Push it about 1 second to attract attention;
twice to unlock the other doors. the horn will sound and the exterior
Some exterior lights will flash twice lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
each time you press the button. This To cancel panic mode, press any
button does not work when the key other button on the remote
is in the ignition switch. transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
TRUNK switch is in the door activated TRUNK RELEASE − Press this
RELEASE LOCK
BUTTON BUTTON position) will come on when you button for about 1 second to open
press the UNLOCK button. If you do the trunk. You cannot open the trunk
not open any door, the light stays on if the key is in the ignition switch.
LOCK − Press this button once to for about 30 seconds, then fades out.
lock all doors. Some exterior lights If you relock the doors with the Remote Transmitter Care
will flash once. When you push remote transmitter before 30 Avoid dropping or throwing the
LOCK twice within 5 seconds, you seconds have elapsed, the light goes transmitter.
will hear a horn to verify that the off immediately. Protect the transmitter from
doors are locked. You cannot lock extreme temperature.
the doors if any door is not fully If you unlock the doors with the Do not immerse the transmitter in
closed or the key is in the ignition remote transmitter, but do not open any liquid.
switch. any of the doors within 30 seconds, If you lose a transmitter, the
If you push the LOCK button twice the doors automatically relock and replacement needs to be
within 5 seconds, you will hear a the security system will also set. reprogrammed by your dealer.
horn to verify that the security
system has set.

０７／０８／０７１７：５９：２５３１ＳＮＣ６２０００９４
Remote Transmitter
Replacing the Transmitter

Battery
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
BATTERY
possible.

Battery type: CR1616
SCREW TAB
To replace the battery: 3. Inside the transmitter, separate

the inner cover from the keypad
1. Remove the screw at the base of by releasing the two tabs on the
the transmitter with a small cover.
Phillips-head screwdriver.
2. Separate the transmitter by prying

its middle seam with your
fingernail.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１７：５９：３４３１ＳＮＣ６２０００９５
Remote Transmitter, Seats
4. Remove the old battery from the As required by the FCC: Front Seat Adjustments
back of the inner cover, and note This device complies with Part 15 of the See pages 11 − 13 for important safety
the polarity. Make sure the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the information and warnings about how to
polarity of the new battery is the following two conditions: (1) This device properly position seats and seat-backs.
same (＋ side facing down), then may not cause harmful interference, and Make all adjustments before you
insert it into the back of the cover. (2) this device must accept any start driving.
interference received, including
An improperly disposed of battery interference that may cause undesired
can hurt the environment. operation.
Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
5. Install the parts in reverse order. compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry

Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must To adjust the seat forward or
accept any interference that may cause backward, pull up on the bar under
undesired operation of the device. the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
release the bar. Try to move the seat
to make sure it is locked in position.

０７／０８／０７１７：５９：４２３１ＳＮＣ６２０００９６
Seats
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Head Restraints

See page 13 for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
Your vehicle is equipped with head

restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
To change the seat-back angle of the

front seat, pull up the lever on the The height of your driver’s seat is
outside of the seat bottom. adjustable. To raise the seat,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, outside of the seat cushion. To lower
rock it back and forth to make sure it the seat, push the lever down
is locked in position. repeatedly.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１７：５９：４９３１ＳＮＣ６２０００９７
Seats
Front Rear Center Position

CUSHION
CUSHION LEG
LEGS RELEASE
SEAT-BACK BUTTON SEAT-BACK RELEASE BUTTON
They are most effective when you Adjusting the Head Restraint When a passenger is seated in the
adjust them so the center of the back The head restraints adjust for height. rear center seating position, make
of the occupant’s head rests against You need both hands to adjust a sure the center head restraint is
the center of the restraint. restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it adjusted to its highest position.
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.

０７／０８／０７１７：５９：５９３１ＳＮＣ６２０００９８
Seats
Removing the Head Restraint Active Head Restraints This reduces the distance between
To remove a head restraint for the restraint and the occupant’s head.
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as It also helps protect the occupants
it will go. Push the release button, against whiplash and injuries to the
then pull the restraint out of the seat- neck and upper spine.
back.

After a collision, the activated
restraint should return to its normal
position.
Failure to reinstall the head
restraints can result in severe If the restraints do not return to their
injury during a crash. normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle
Always replace the head inspected by a Honda dealer.
restraints before driving. The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
When reinstalling a head restraint, the rear, the occupant properly
put the legs back in place. Then secured with the seat belt will be
adjust it to the appropriate height pushed against the seat-back and the
while pressing the release button. head restraint will automatically
move forward.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：００：０８３１ＳＮＣ６２０００９９
Seats, Power Windows
For a head restraint system to work Armrest Power Windows

properly:
DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH
Do not hang any items on the head
restraints, or from the restraint
legs.
Do not place any object between

an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper

location.
MAIN SWITCH
Only use genuine Honda
replacement head restraints. The lid of the console compartment Turn the ignition switch to the ON
can be used as an armrest by moving (II) position to raise or lower any
it forward and backward. Make sure window. To open the window, push
the armrest is securely latched. the switch down and hold it. Release
the switch when you want to stop the
Make sure your passenger’s hands window. To close the window, pull
or fingers are away from the armrest back on the switch and hold it.
before moving it.
The windows operate for up to 10
minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.

０７／０８／０７１８：００：１６３１ＳＮＣ６２００１００
Power Windows, Mirrors
AUTO − To open or close the Mirrors

driver’s window, push or pull the
Closing a power window on window switch firmly down or up to TAB
someone’s hands or fingers can the second detent, and release it.
cause serious injury. The window will automatically go
down or up all the way. To stop the

Make sure your passengers are window, pull or push the window
away from the windows before switch briefly.
closing them.
AUTO REVERSE − If the driver’s
window senses any obstacle while it
If the MAIN switch is OFF, the is closing automatically, it will
passenger windows cannot be raised reverse direction, and then stop. To
or lowered. Keep the MAIN switch close the window, remove the
off when you have children in the obstacle, then use the window switch Keep the inside and outside mirrors
vehicle so they do not injure again. clean and adjusted for best visibility.
themselves by operating the Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
windows unintentionally. Auto reverse stops sensing when the you start driving.
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and The inside mirror has day and night
objects are away from the window positions. The night position reduces
before closing it. glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.

０７／０８／０７１８：００：２５３１ＳＮＣ６２００１０１
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors Heated Mirrors
SELECTOR SWITCH ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON 3. Push the appropriate edge of the On Canadian models
(II) position. adjustment switch to move the The outside mirrors are heated to
mirror right, left, up, or down. remove fog and frost. With the
2. Move the selector switch to L ignition switch in the ON (II)
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s 4. When you finish, move the position, turn on the heaters by
side). selector switch to the center (off) pressing the button. The indicator in
position. This turns the the button comes on as a reminder.
adjustment switch off to keep your Press the button again to turn the
settings. heaters off. Pressing this button also
turns the rear window defogger on
and off.

０７／０８／０７１８：００：２９３１ＳＮＣ６２００１０２
Parking Brake
Driving the vehicle with the parking

brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound
if the vehicle is driven with the parking

brake on.
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
To apply the parking brake, pull the

lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page 58 ).

０７／０８／０７１８：００：３３３１ＳＮＣ６２００１０３
Interior Convenience Items
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
COAT HOOK COIN BOX CENTER POCKET VANITY MIRROR
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
GLOVE BOX
BEVERAGE HOLDERS

０７／０８／０７１８：００：４３３１ＳＮＣ６２００１０４
Interior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders Another accessory power socket is in Console Compartment

Be careful when you are using the the center console compartment.
beverage holders. A spilled liquid When more than one socket is being LEVER
that is very hot can scald you or your used, the combined power rating of
passengers. Spilled liquids can the accessories should be 120 watts
damage the upholstery, carpeting, or less (10 amps).

and electrical components in the
interior. Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling the
Open the front beverage holder by handle to the left. Close it with a firm
sliding its cover backward. push. ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
Accessory Power Socket CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
This socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories An open glove box can cause To open the console compartment,
that are rated 120 watts or less (10 serious injury to your passenger pull up on the lever, and lift the lid.
amps). It will not power an in a crash, even if the
automotive type cigarette lighter passenger is wearing the seat To close, lower the lid, and push it
element. belt. down until it latches.
To use an accessory power socket, Always keep the glove box

the ignition switch must be in the closed while driving.
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

０７／０８／０７１８：００：５２３１ＳＮＣ６２００１０５
Interior Lights
Ceiling Light After all doors are closed tightly, the Spotlights
light dims slightly, then fades out in
DOOR ACTIVATED about 30 seconds.
ON If you do not open any door after you

unlock the driver’s door or remove
the key from the ignition switch, the
OFF light(s) fades out in about 30
seconds.
If you leave either door open without

the key is in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light will go off after 3
minutes.
The ceiling light has a three-position The front ceiling light has two
switch; ON, Door Activated, and spotlights. Push the spotlight lenses
OFF. In the Door Activated (center) to turn them on and off.
position, the light comes on when
you:
Open any door.
Unlock the doors with the key or
remote transmitter.
Remove the key from the ignition.

０７／０８／０７１８：００：５８３１ＳＮＣ６２００１０６
Main Menu
Features
The heating and air conditioning Climate Control .............................. 102

system in your vehicle provides a Audio System ................................. 108
comfortable driving environment in Audio System (Models without
all weather conditions. navigation system) ................ 110
To Play the Radio ...................... 111
The standard audio system has Playing the XM Satellite
many features. This section Radio (Optional) .................... 114
describes those features and how to To Play a Disc ............................ 120
Features
use them. (If you have an optional Disc Player Error Messages .... 126
audio system, refer to the operating Audio System (Models with
instructions that came with it.) navigation system) ................ 128
Playing the Radio ....................... 128
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio Playing the XM Satellite
system that requires a code number Radio ....................................... 132
to enable it. Playing a Disc ............................. 140
Disc Player Error Messages .... 148
The security system helps to dis- Playing a PC Card ...................... 149
courage vandalism and theft of your PC Card Error Messages ......... 160
vehicle. AM/FM Radio Reception ............. 161
Protecting Your Discs ................... 163
Radio Theft Protection.................. 166
Remote Audio Controls................. 167
Setting the Clock ........................... 168
Security System ............................. 169
Cruise Control ................................ 170

０７／０８／０７１８：０１：０１３１ＳＮＣ６２００１０７
Climate Control
AUTO BUTTON
TEMPERATURE CONTROL FAN CONTROL DIAL

DIAL
MODE CONTROL BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

FRESH AIR BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON
OFF BUTTON

０７／０８／０７１８：０１：１４３１ＳＮＣ６２００１０８
Climate Control
Voice Control System The system automatically selects the Semi-automatic Operation
Only on models equipped with proper mix of conditioned and/or You can manually select various
Navigation System heated air that will, as quickly as functions of the climate control
The climate control system for your possible, raise or lower the interior system when it is in full automatic
vehicle can also be operated using temperature to your preference. mode. All other features remain
the voice control system. See the automatically controlled.
Navigation section in your Quick When you set the temperature to its
Start Guide for an overview of this lower limit ( ) or its upper limit Making any manual selection causes
Features
system and the Navigation System ( ), the system runs at full the word AUTO in the display to go
manual for complete details. cooling or heating only. It does not out.
regulate the interior temperature.
Using Automatic Climate Control Fan Control Dial
The automatic climate control In cold weather, the fan will not Turn this dial to increase or decrease
system adjusts the fan speed and come on automatically until the the fan speed and airflow.
airflow levels to maintain the interior heater starts to develop warm air.
temperature you select. Temperature Control Dial
In ‘‘AUTO’’ mode, the air conditioner Turning this dial clockwise increases
Press the AUTO button. may not work if the humidity inside the temperature of the airflow.
Set the desired temperature by the vehicle is low. To activate the air
turning the temperature control conditioner, press A/C button.
dial. You will see AUTO in the
system’s display.

０７／０８／０７１８：０１：３０３１ＳＮＣ６２００１０９
Climate Control
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button The system should be left in fresh Airflow is divided between
This button turns the air air mode under almost all conditions. the floor vents and defroster vents at
conditioning on and off. The Keeping the system in recirculation the base of the windshield.
indicator in the button is on when mode, particularly with the A/C off,
the A/C is on. can cause the windows to fog up. Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Recirculation Button Mode Control Button
When the recirculation indicator is Use the mode control buttons to When you select , the system
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is select the vents air flows from. Some automatically switches to fresh air
sent throughout the system again. air will flow from the dashboard mode and turns on the A/C.
To select recirculation mode when corner vents in all modes.
driving through dusty or smoky In AUTO mode, the system controls
conditions, then return to fresh air Air flows from the center the airflow direction automatically
mode. and corner vents in the dashboard. between the dashboard vents and
the floor vents.
Fresh Air Button Airflow is divided between
The outside air intakes for the the vents in the dashboard and the
heating and cooling system are at floor vents.
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris. Air flows from the floor
vents. When you select , the
When the flesh air indicator is on, air system automatically switches to
is brought in from the outside of the fresh air mode.
vehicle.

０７／０８／０７１８：０１：４３３１ＳＮＣ６２００１１０
Climate Control
Ventilation Using the A/C Dehumidify the Interior

The flow-through ventilation system Air conditioning places an extra load Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
draws in outside air, circulates it on the engine. Watch the engine moisture from the air. When used in
through the interior, then exhausts it coolant temperature gauge (see page combination with the heater, it
through vents near the rear side 65 ). If it moves near the red zone, makes the interior warm and dry and
panels. turn off the A/C until the gauge can prevent the windows from
1. Set the temperature to the lower reading returns to normal. fogging up.
limit.
Features
2. Make sure the A/C is off. 1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the 1. Turn the fan on.
3. Select and fresh air mode. button. The indicator in the button 2. Turn on the air conditioning.
4. Set the fan to the desired speed. comes on when a fan speed is 3. Select and fresh air mode.
selected. 4. Adjust the temperature to your
Using the Heater 2. Make sure the temperature is set preference.
The heater uses engine coolant to to maximum cool.
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it 3. Select . This setting is suitable for all driving
will be several minutes before you 4. If the outside air is humid, select conditions whenever the outside
feel warm air coming from the recirculation mode. If the outside temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
system. air is dry, select fresh air mode.
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
1. Select .
When you select , the system If the interior is very warm, you can
automatically switches to the fresh cool it down more rapidly by partially
air mode. opening the windows, turning on the
2. Set the fan to the desired speed. A/C, and setting the fan to
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with maximum speed in fresh air mode.
the temperature control dial.

０７／０８／０７１８：０１：４９３１ＳＮＣ６２００１１１
Climate Control
To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice To clear the windows faster, you can
To remove fog from the inside of the From the Windows close the dashboard corner vents by
windows: rotating the wheel below each vent.
1. Select . When you select This sends more warm air to the
1. Set the fan to the desired speed, or , the system automatically windshield defroster vents. Once the
high for faster defrosting. switches to fresh air mode and windshield is clear, select fresh air
2. Select . When you select turns on the A/C. The A/C mode to avoid fogging the windows.
, the system automatically indicator will not come on, if it was
switches to fresh air mode and previously off. For your safety, make sure you have
turns on the A/C. The A/C 2. Select . a clear view through all the windows
indicator will not come on, if it was 3. Set the fan and temperature before driving.
previously off. controls to maximum level.
3. Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
4. Select to help clear the
rear window.
5. To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.

０７／０８／０７１８：０１：５５３１ＳＮＣ６２００１１２
Climate Control
To Turn Everything Off Sunlight, Temperature, and

Press the OFF button. However, a Humidity Sensors
lack of airflow can cause the
windows to fog up. You should keep
the fan on at all times so stale air and
moisture do not build up in the
interior and cause fogging.
Features
SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR
To regulate the interior temperature

and humidity, the climate control
system has two sensors. A sunlight
sensor is located in the top of the
dashboard and a temperature/
humidity sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or, spill liquid or spray
chemical cleaners on the sensors.

０７／０８／０７１８：０２：０１３１ＳＮＣ６２００１１３
Audio System
Read the appropriate pages in this

On models without navigation system
section for operation of the audio
systems installed in your vehicle.
For vehicles without navigation

system, see pages 108 through 127 .
For vehicles with navigation system,

see pages 128 through 160 .
If your vehicle has a different audio

system, refer to its manual for
operating instructions.

０７／０８／０７１８：０２：０４３１ＳＮＣ６２００１１４
Audio System
U.S. model with navigation system
Features
０７／０８／０７１８：０２：０８３１ＳＮＣ６２００１１５
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
SCAN AM FM AUTO SELECT BUTTON

BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB SEEK BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS TUNE/SOUND KNOB

０７／０８／０７１８：０２：１９３１ＳＮＣ６２００１１６
To Play the Radio TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to If you do nothing, the system will
The ignition switch must be in the tune the radio to a desired frequency. then scan for the next strong station
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) Turn the knob right to tune to a and play it for 10 seconds. When it
position. Turn the system on by higher frequency, or left to tune to a plays a station you want to listen to,
pushing the PWR/VOL knob, or the lower frequency. press the SCAN button again.
AM or FM button. Adjust the volume
by turning the PWR/VOL knob. SEEK − The seek function Preset − Each side of the buttons
searches up and down from the (1 through 6) can store one
Features
The band and frequency that the current frequency to find a station frequency on AM, and two
radio was last tuned to is displayed. with a strong signal. To activate it, frequencies on FM.
To change bands, press the AM or press the or side of the
FM button. On the FM band, ST will SEEK bar, then release it. 1. Select the desired band, AM or
be displayed if the station is broad- FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
casting in stereo. Stereo SCAN − The scan function samples twelve stations.
reproduction on AM is not available. all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
To Select a Station the SCAN button, then release it. function to tune the radio to a
You can use any of five methods to You will see SCAN in the display. desired station.
find radio stations on the selected The system will scan for a station
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset with a strong signal. When it finds 3. Pick a preset number (1−6), and
bars, and auto select. one, it will stop and play that station hold it until you hear a beep.
for about 10 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：０２：２６３１ＳＮＣ６２００１１７
AUTO SELECT − If you are You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after Adjusting the Sound
traveling far from home and can no pressing a preset button if auto Press the SOUND (TUNE) knob
longer receive your preset stations, select cannot find a strong station for repeatedly to display the BASS,
you can use the auto select feature to that preset button. TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, and
find stations in the local area. SVC (speed-sensitive volume
If you do not like the stations auto compensation) settings.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’ select has stored, you can store
flashes in the display, and the system other frequencies on the preset Each mode is shown in the display as
goes into scan mode for several buttons as previously described. it changes. Turn the SOUND
seconds. It stores the frequencies of (TUNE) knob to adjust the setting to
six AM, and twelve FM stations in To turn off auto select, press the your liking. When the level reaches
the preset buttons. A. SEL (auto select) button. This the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’ in
restores the presets you originally the display. The system will
set. automatically return the display to
the selected audio mode about 5
seconds after you stop adjusting a
mode.

０７／０８／０７１８：０２：３２３１ＳＮＣ６２００１１８
Treble/Bass − Use the TREBLE/ Speed-sensitive volume Audio System Lighting

BASS modes to adjust the tone to compensation (SVC) − The SVC You can use the instrument panel
your liking. mode controls the volume based on brightness control buttons to adjust
vehicle speed. The faster you go, the the illumination of the audio system
Balance/Fader − These two louder the audio volume becomes. (see page 74 ). The audio system
modes adjust the strength of the As you slow down, the audio volume illuminates when the parking lights
sound coming from each speaker. decreases. are on, even if the radio is off.
BALANCE adjusts the side-to-side
Features
strength, while FADER adjusts the The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
front-to-back strength. SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. The default setting is MID.
Turn the SOUND (TUNE) knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
If you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.

０７／０８／０７１８：０２：３８３１ＳＮＣ６２００１１９
Playing the XM Satellite Radio

Optional on U.S. models
Your audio system is capable of POWER/VOLUME KNOB DISPLAY BUTTON
receiving XM Satellite Radio
anywhere in the United States, SCAN BUTTON CD/AUX BUTTON
except Hawaii and Alaska.
XM is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
XM satellite radio receives signals

from two satellites to produce clear,
high-quality digital reception. It
offers many channels in several
categories. Along with a large
selection of different types of music,
XM satellite radio allows you to view
channel and category selections in
the display.
PRESET BUTTONS TUNE KNOB

０７／０８／０７１８：０２：４６３１ＳＮＣ６２００１２０
Operating the XM Radio MODE − To switch between You may experience periods when
To listen to XM radio, turn the channel mode and category mode, XM Radio does not transmit the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY press and hold the DISP/MODE artist’s name and song title
(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the button until the mode changes. information. If this happens, there is
power/volume knob to turn on the In channel mode, you can select all nothing wrong with your system.
audio system, and press the ‘‘AUX’’ of the available channels. In category
button. Adjust the volume by turning mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, TUNE − Turn the TUNE knob to
the knob. The last channel you etc., you can select all of the change channel selections. Turn the
Features
listened to will show in the display. channels within that category. knob right for higher numbered
Each time you press and release the channels and left for lower
DISP/MODE button, the display numbered channels. In the category
changes in the following sequence: mode, you can only select channels
Channel name, channel number, within that category.
category, artist name, and music title.
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY) −
Press either side of the CATEGORY
button ( or ) to select
another category.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：０２：５７３１ＳＮＣ６２００１２１
SCAN − The scan function gives 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan XM Radio Display Messages
you a sampling of all channels while function to tune to a desired
in the channel mode. In the category channel. ‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
mode, only the channels within that audio or program information.
category are scanned. To activate In category mode, only channels
scan, press the SCAN button. The within that category can be selected. ‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
system plays each channel in In channel mode, all channels can be currently selected is no longer
numerical order for a few seconds, selected. broadcasting.
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to 3. Pick a preset number you want for ‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
continue listening to, press the that channel. Press and hold the code is being updated. Wait until the
button again. button until you hear a beep. encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
Preset − You can store up to 12 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the normally.
preset channels using each side of first six channels.
the preset button. Each side of the ‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
button stores one channel from the 5. Press the AUX button again. Store currently too weak. Move the vehicle
XM1 band and one channel from the the next six channels using steps 2 to an area away from tall buildings,
XM2 band. and 3. and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
To store a channel: Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper side of the preset
1. Press the AUX button. Either XM1 button to tune to it.
or XM2 will show in the display.

０７／０８／０７１８：０３：０３３１ＳＮＣ６２００１２２
‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel

number does not exist, or is not part Signal may be blocked by Signal weaker in
of your subscription, or this channel mountains or large obstacles to these areas.
the south.
has no artist or title information at
this time.
‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem

with the XM antenna. Please consult
Features
your dealer.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
The XM satellites are in orbit over Satellite signals are more likely to be
the equator; therefore, objects south blocked by tall buildings and
of the vehicle may cause satellite mountains the farther north you
reception interruptions. To help travel from the equator. Carrying
compensate for this, ground-based large items on a roof rack can also
repeaters are placed in major block the signal.
metropolitan areas.

０７／０８／０７１８：０３：１３３１ＳＮＣ６２００１２３
Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly Your I.D. will appear in the display.
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for
these conditions: compliance could void the user’s After you’ve registered with XM
authority to operate the equipment. Radio, keep your audio system in the
Driving on the north side of an satellite radio mode while you wait
east/west mountain road. Receiving Satellite Radio Service for activation. This should take about
Driving on the north side of a If your XM Satellite Radio service 30 minutes.
large commercial truck on an has expired or you purchased your
east/west road. vehicle from a previous owner, you While waiting for activation, make
Driving in tunnels. can listen to a sampling of the sure your vehicle remains in an open
Driving on a road beside a vertical broadcasts available on XM Satellite area with good reception. Once your
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south Radio. With the ignition switch in the audio system is activated, you’ll be
of you. ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
Driving on the lower level of a push the power/volume knob to turn XM Radio will continue to send an
multi-tiered road. on the audio system and press the activation signal to your vehicle for
Driving on a single lane road XM button. A variety of music types at least 12 hours from the activation
alongside dense trees taller than and styles will play. request. If the service has not been
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Large items carried on a roof rack. If you decide to purchase XM Radio.
satellite radio service, contact XM
There may be other geographic Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at
situations that could affect XM radio 1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
reception. them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE

０７／０８／０７１８：０３：１７３１ＳＮＣ６２００１２４
EJECT BUTTON REPEAT CD BUTTON

BUTTON
LOAD RANDOM DISPLAY
INDICATOR BUTTON BUTTON
Features
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB FOLDER KNOB

０７／０８／０７１８：０３：２８３１ＳＮＣ６２００１２５
To Play a Disc The specifications of the compatible Insert the disc about halfway into the
To load or play discs, the ignition MP3 file are: disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
switch must be in the ACCESSORY −Sampling frequency: in the rest of the way and begin to
(I) or ON (II) position. 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) play it. When the system reaches the
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2) end of the disc, it will return to the
You operate the CD player with the −Bit rate: beginning and play the disc again.
same controls used for the radio. To 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
select the CD player, press the CD 160/192/224/256/320 kbps You cannot load and play 3-inch
button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the (MPEG1) (8-cm) discs in this system.
display. The number of the track 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
playing is shown in the display. The 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2) To play the radio when a disc is
system will continuously play a disc −Compatible with variable bit rate playing, press the AM or FM button.
until you change modes. and multi-session Press the CD button again to switch
−Maximum layers back to the disc player.
The disc player can also play CD-Rs (including ROOT): 8 layers
and CD-RWs compressed in CD-
TEXT, MP3, and WMA formats. The specifications of the compatible
When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA, WMA file are: Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
you will see ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ in the −Sampling frequency: The label can curl up and cause the
display. You can select up to 255 32/44.1/48 kHz disc to jam in the unit.
folders or tracks. −Bit rate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
Video CDs and DVDs will not work −Compatible with variable bit rate
in this unit. and multi-session.
−Maximum layers (including
ROOT): 8 layers

０７／０８／０７１８：０３：３９３１ＳＮＣ６２００１２６
Text Data Display Function You will also see some text data To Change or Select Tracks/Files
Each time you press the DISP button, under these conditions: Use the SEEK/SKIP button while a
the display shows you the text data disc is playing to select passages and
on a disc, if the disc was recorded When a new folder, file, or track is change tracks (files in MP3/WMA
with text data. selected. mode).
You can see the album, artist, and When you change the audio mode In MP3/WMA mode, use the
track name in the display. If a disc is to play a disc with text data or in FOLDER knob to select folders in
Features
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can MP3 or WMA. the disc, and use the SEEK/SKIP
see the folder and file name, and the button to change files.
artist, album, and track tag. When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display. When playing a CD-DA with text
The TRACK indicator is shown with data, the album and track name are
the file or track name. shown in the display. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
The display shows up to about 16 folder and file name.
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.). If the
text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the ＞ indicator in
the display. Press and hold the DISP
button until the next 16 characters
are shown. CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：０３：４３３１ＳＮＣ６２００１２７
SEEK/SKIP − Each time you In MP3 or WMA mode REPEAT (TRACK/FILE

press and release the side of FOLDER SELECTION − To REPEAT) − To continuously replay
the SEEK/SKIP button, the player select a different folder, turn the a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),
skips forward to the beginning of the TUNE knob to move to the press and release the RPT button.
next track (file in MP3 or WMA beginning of the next folder. Turn You will see RPT in the display.
mode). Press and release the the knob to the right to skip to the Press and hold the RPT button for 2
side to skip backward to the next folder, and to the left to move to seconds to turn it off.
beginning of the current track. Press the beginning of the current folder.
it again to skip to the beginning of Turn it again to skip to the beginning
the previous track. of the previous folder. Turning the
TUNE knob more than one click
To move rapidly within a track, press skips several folders at a time.
and hold the or side of the
SEEK/SKIP button.

０７／０８／０７１８：０３：５０３１ＳＮＣ６２００１２８
In MP3 or WMA mode RANDOM (Random within a In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER-REPEAT − This feature, disc/folder) − This feature plays FOLDER-RANDOM − This
when activated, replays all files on the tracks within a disc (the files feature, when activated, plays all
the selected folder in the order they within a folder in MP3 or WMA files in each folder in random order.
are compressed. To activate folder mode) in random order. To activate To activate folder random, press the
repeat, press the RPT button twice. random play, press and release the RDM button twice. You will hear a
You will hear a beep and see F-RPT RDM button. In MP3 or WMA mode, beep and see F-RDM in the display.
in the display. The system press the RDM button repeatedly to The system will then select and play
Features
continuously replays the current select RDM (within a folder random files randomly. This continues until
folder. Press the RPT button again to play). You will see RDM in the you deactivate folder random by
turn it off. Pressing the RDM button, display. Press the RDM button for 2 pressing the RDM button again, or
or selecting a different folder with seconds to return to normal play. by selecting a different folder with
the TUNE knob also turns off the the TUNE knob.
repeat feature.
Each time you press and release the
Each time you press and release the RDM button, the mode changes
RPT button, the mode changes from from folder random play to random
file repeat to folder repeat, then to play (within a folder random play),
normal playing. then to normal playing.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：０３：５８３１ＳＮＣ６２００１２９
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) − In MP3 or WMA mode To Stop Playing a Disc

The scan function samples all tracks F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN) − This Press the eject button ( ) to
(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in feature, when activated, samples the remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
the order they are recorded on the first file of each folder on the disc. but do not remove it from the slot,
disc. To activate scan, press the To activate folder scan, press the the system will automatically reload
SCAN button. In MP3 or WMA SCAN button twice. You will see it after 10 seconds and put it in pause
mode, press the SCAN button F-SCAN in the display. mode. To begin playing, press the
repeatedly to select SCAN. You will CD button.
see SCAN in the display. You will get The system plays the first file in the
a 10 second sampling of each track/ first folder for about 10 seconds. If You can also eject the disc when the
file on the disc. Press the SCAN you do nothing, the system will then ignition switch is off.
button again to get out of scan mode play the first files in the remaining
and play the last track/file sampled. folders for 10 seconds each. After To play the radio when a disc is
playing the first file of the last folder, playing, press the AM or FM button.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/ the system plays normally. Press the CD button again to switch
SKIP button also turns off the scan back to the disc player.
feature. Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP button, selecting a different
folder with the TUNE knob, or
pressing the SCAN button, also turns
off the folder scan.
Each time you press and release the

SCAN button, the mode changes
from folder scan to scan, then to
normal playing.

０７／０８／０７１８：０４：０５３１ＳＮＣ６２００１３０
If you turn the system off while a Operating the Optional Disc If you select an empty slot in the
disc is playing, either with the Changer magazine, the changer will search
power/volume knob or by turning An optional six or eight disc changer for the next available disc to load and
off the ignition switch, the disc will is available for your vehicle. This play.
stay in the drive. When you turn the disc changer uses the same controls
system back on, the disc will begin used for the in-dash disc player or Protecting Discs
playing where it left off. the radio. For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
Features
Load the desired discs in the 163 .
magazine, and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
To select the disc changer, press the

CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different disc, use the preset 4
(DISC −) or the preset 1 (DISC ＋)
on the preset button. To select the
previous disc, press the preset 4
(DISC −), or the preset 1 (DISC ＋)
to select the next disc in sequence.

０７／０８／０７１８：０４：１４３１ＳＮＣ６２００１３１
Disc Player Error Messages

The chart on the right explains the Error Cause Solution
error messages you may see in the Message
display while playing a disc. HEAT ERROR
High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
If you see an error message in the FORMAT
Track/File format not Current track will be skipped. The next
display while playing a disc, press supported supported track or file plays automatically.
the eject button. After ejecting the BAD DISC Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
disc, check it for damage or PLEASE CHECK Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation. If there is no damage, OWNER’S Mechanical Error deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
insert the disc again. MANUAL PUSH (see page 165). Insert the disc again. If the code
For the additional information on EJECT does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be
damaged discs, see page 164 . BAD DISC removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
PLEASE CHECK Servo Error force the disc out the player.
The audio system will try to play the OWNER’S
disc. If there is still a problem, the MANUAL
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new

disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.

０７／０８／０７１８：０４：２３３１ＳＮＣ６２００１３２
Optional Disc Changer Error

Messages Error Cause Solution
The chart on the right explains the Message
error messages you may see in the Press the magazine eject button, and pull the
display while playing a disc. FOCUS Error magazine out. If the message does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
If you see an error message in the see your dealer.
display while playing a disc, press No disc in the disc Insert disc.
Features
the eject button. After ejecting the magazine
disc, check it for damage or Press the magazine eject button, pull the
deformation. If there is no damage, magazine out, check for an error message, then
insert the disc again. Mechanical Error insert the magazine again. If the message does
not disappear, or the magazine cannot be pulled
If there is still a problem, the error out, see your dealer.
message will appear again. Press the No disc magazine in the Insert disc magazine.
eject button, and pull out the disc. disc changer
High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
Insert a different disc. If the new normal.
disc plays, there is a problem with

０７／０８／０７１８：０４：２９３１ＳＮＣ６２００１３３
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Voice Control System Playing the AM/FM Radio

In addition to the standard audio
controls, the audio system in your
vehicle can be operated using the
voice control system. See the FM2 ICON
navigation section in your Quick
Start Guide for an overview of this FM1 ICON AM ICON
system, and the Navigation System
Manual for complete details.
AM/FM
BUTTON
AUTO SELECT
AUDIO ICON
BUTTON
BACKGROUND
SCAN ICON
BUTTON SOUND ICON
TUNE BAR PRESET BUTTONS

０７／０８／０７１８：０４：３８３１ＳＮＣ６２００１３４
To Play the AM/FM Radio The band and frequency that the To Select a Station
The ignition switch must be in the radio was last tuned to are displayed. You can use any of five methods to
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. To change bands, press the AM/FM find radio stations on the selected
Turn the system on by pushing the button, or touch the desired band band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
power/volume knob or the AM/FM icon (FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2). buttons, and auto select.
button. Adjust the volume by turning On the FM band, STEREO will be
the power/volume knob. displayed if the station is TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo the radio to a desired frequency.
Features
Pushing the AUDIO button will also reproduction on AM is not available. Press the ▲ side of the bar to tune
turn on the system. to a higher frequency, and press the
For information on XM radio, see ▼ side to tune to a lower
You can also operate the audio page 132 . frequency.
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Use the Press and hold the ▲ or ▼ side of
control buttons on the left side of the the TUNE bar until you hear two
screen. The status bar appears on beeps to change the frequency
the bottom of the screen each time rapidly. Release the bar when the
you operate any of the control display reaches the desired
buttons. On the navigation screen, frequency.
you can also see audio information
by touching the AUDIO INFO icon
on the lower of the screen.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：０４：４６３１ＳＮＣ６２００１３５
SEEK − The seek function If you do nothing, the system will Each preset button’s frequency is
searches up and down from the then scan for the next strong station shown on the bottom of the audio
current frequency to find a station and play it for 10 seconds. When it display.
with a strong signal. To activate it, plays a station you want to listen to,
press and hold the ▲ or ▼ side of press the SCAN button again.
the TUNE bar until you hear a beep,
then release it. Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
SCAN − The scan function samples frequencies on FM.
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press 1. Select the desired band, AM or
the SCAN button, then release it. FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
You will see SCAN in the display. two frequencies with each preset
The system will scan for a station button.
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
for about 10 seconds. function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset button, and hold it

until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a

total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.

０７／０８／０７１８：０４：５１３１ＳＮＣ６２００１３６
AUTO SELECT − If you are You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
traveling far from home and can no pressing a preset button if auto
longer receive your preset stations, select cannot find a strong station for
you can use the auto select feature to every preset button.
find stations in the local area.
If you do not like the stations auto
Press the AUDIO button to view the select has stored, you can store
audio control icons, then press the other frequencies on the preset
Features
AUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTO buttons as previously described.
SEL flashing in the display, and the
system goes into scan mode for To turn off auto select, press the
several seconds. It stores the AUTO SEL icon. This restores the
frequencies of six AM, and twelve presets you originally set.
FM stations in the preset buttons.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
161 .

０７／０８／０７１８：０４：５７３１ＳＮＣ６２００１３７

Playing the XM Satellite Radio
XM RADIO ICON MODE ICON
POWER/VOLUME JOYSTICK
KNOB
CATEGORY
INDICATOR
AM/FM BUTTON
XM RADIO
BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
PRESET CHANNEL
NUMBER
TUNE BAR PRESET BUTTONS

０７／０８／０７１８：０５：０５３１ＳＮＣ６２００１３８
Your audio system is capable of Operating the XM Radio MODE − To switch between
receiving XM Satellite Radio To listen to XM radio, turn the channel mode and category mode,
anywhere in the United States, ignition switch to the ACCESSORY touch the MODE icon. In channel
except Hawaii and Alaska. (I) or the ON (II) position. Push the mode, you can select all of the
power/volume knob to turn on the available channels. In category mode,
XM is a registered trademark of audio system, and press the CD/XM such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.,
XM Satellite Radio, Inc. button. Adjust the volume by turning you can select all of the channels
the knob. The last channel you within that category. Each time you
Features
XM radio receives signals from two listened to will show in the display. touch and release the MODE icon,
satellites to produce clear, high- the display changes between the
quality digital reception. It offers You can also change to the XM radio channel mode and the category
many channels in several categories. while you are listening to an FM mode.
Along with a large selection of station, AM station, disc, pc card, etc.,
different types of music, XM radio by touching the XM1 or XM2 icon on
allows you to view channel and the audio display.
category selections in the display.
When you press and hold the You can also operate the radio using
AUDIO button, the display also the control buttons on the left side of
shows all XM information. the screen. The status bar appears
on the bottom of the screen each
time you press any of the control
buttons. On the navigation screen,
you can also see the audio
information by touching the AUDIO
INFO icon on the lower of the screen.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：０５：１５３１ＳＮＣ６２００１３９
TUNE − Press the TUNE bar to Preset − You can store up to 12

change channel selections. Press preset channels using each preset
▲ for higher numbered channels button or preset icons on the screen.
and ▼ for lower numbered Each preset button or icon stores
channels. In the category mode, you one channel from the XM1 band and
can only select channels within that one channel from the XM2 band.
category.
To store a channel:
CATEGORY − Press and hold
either side of the TUNE bar 1. Press the XM button. Either XM1
( or ) until you hear a beep or XM2 will show in the display.
to select another category.
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
On the audio display, you will see the SCAN − The scan function gives function to tune to a desired
selected CHANNEL (number), you a sampling of all channels while channel.
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name), in the channel mode. In the category
and TITLE (music title). mode, only the channels within that In category mode, only channels
category are scanned. To activate within that category can be selected.
You may experience periods when scan, press the SCAN button or In channel mode, all channels can be
XM Radio does not transmit the touch the SCAN icon on the screen. selected.
artist’s name and song title The system plays each channel in
information. If this happens, there is numerical order for a few seconds, 3. Pick the preset button (icon) you
nothing wrong with your system. then selects the next channel. When want for that channel. Press and
you hear a channel you want to listen hold the button (icon) until you
to, press the button or touch the icon hear a beep.
again.

０７／０８／０７１８：０５：２４３１ＳＮＣ６２００１４０
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the XM Radio Display Messages ‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
first six channels. currently too weak. Move the vehicle
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the to an area away from tall buildings,
5. Press the XM button again or audio or program information. and with an unobstructed view of the
touch the other XM icon (XM1 or southern horizon.
XM2) on the audio display. Store ‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
the next six channels using steps 2 currently selected is no longer ‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
and 3. broadcasting. number does not exist or is not part
Features
of your subscription.
Once a channel is stored, press and ‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
release the proper preset button code is being updated. Wait until the ‘‘NO INFO’’ − This channel has no
(icon) to tune to it. Each preset encryption code is fully updated. artist or title information at this time.
button’s channel is shown on the Channels 0 and 1 should still work
bottom of the audio display. normally. ‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：０５：２９３１ＳＮＣ６２００１４１
The XM satellites are in orbit over

Signal may be blocked by Signal weaker in the equator; therefore, objects south
mountains or large obstacles to these areas. of the vehicle may cause satellite
the south. reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be

blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER

０７／０８／０７１８：０５：３９３１ＳＮＣ６２００１４２
Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly Your I.D. will appear in the display.
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for
these conditions: compliance could void the user’s After you’ve registered with XM
authority to operate the equipment. Radio, keep your audio system in the
Driving on the north side of an satellite radio mode while you wait
east/west mountain road. Receiving Satellite Radio Service for activation. This should take about
Driving on the north side of a If your XM Satellite Radio service 30 minutes.
Features
large commercial truck on an has expired or you purchased your
east/west road. vehicle from a previous owner, you While waiting for activation, make
Driving in tunnels. can listen to a sampling of the sure your vehicle remains in an open
Driving on a road beside a vertical broadcasts available on XM Satellite area with good reception. Once your
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south Radio. With the ignition switch in the audio system is activated, you’ll be
of you. ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
Driving on the lower level of a push the power/volume knob to turn XM Radio will continue to send an
multi-tiered road. on the audio system and press the activation signal to your vehicle for
Driving on a single lane road XM button. A variety of music types at least 12 hours from the activation
alongside dense trees taller than and styles will play. request. If the service has not been
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Large items carried on a roof rack. If you decide to purchase XM Radio.
Satellite Radio service, contact XM
There may be other geographic Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at
situations that could affect XM radio 1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
reception. them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, press the TUNE

０７／０８／０７１８：０５：５１３１ＳＮＣ６２００１４３
Adjusting the Sound BALANCE − Adjusts the side-to-

side strength of the sound.
SPEAKER SETTING To adjust the left/right balance,
touch the L or R icon.
SUBWOOFER − Adjusts the

strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker. To adjust the
sound strength, touch or
on each side of the adjustment
bar.
BASS/TREBLE SETTING
SOUND ICON The right upper display shows you
BASS − Adjusts the bass. the current setting of the sound
You can adjust the sound on the TREBLE − Adjusts the treble. To strength coming from each speaker.
navigation screen. To adjust the adjust the treble and bass, touch
sound, push the AUDIO button, then or on each side of the SVC (speed-sensitive volume
enter the sound grid by touching the treble or bass adjustment bar. The compensation) − The SVC mode
SOUND icon on the display. adjustment bar on the right lower controls the volume based on vehicle
display shows you the current speed. The faster you go, the louder
setting. the audio volume becomes. As you
slow down, the audio volume
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back decreases. Touch the appropriate
strength of the sound. To adjust the icon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select the
front/rear fader, touch the FR or RR mode.
icon.

０７／０８／０７１８：０５：５８３１ＳＮＣ６２００１４４
This function is set to MID as the Screen Mode Audio System Lighting
default setting when the vehicle You can select the background You can use the instrument panel
leaves the factory. If you feel the screen to display the sound level. brightness control buttons to adjust
sound is too loud, choose low. If you There are three screen modes: level the illumination of the audio system
feel the sound is too quiet, choose Hi. (the sound level is shown with the (see page 74 ). The audio system
vertical bars), spectrum analysis (the illuminates when the parking lights
You can also select the icon with the sound level appears as ripples of are on, even if the radio is off.
joystick. Move it up and down to water), and off. Each time you touch
Features
move the highlighting and scroll the background icon, the display
through lists. Select the icon, then changes.
move the joystick to left or right to
change the setting.
The system will return to the audio

display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.

０７／０８／０７１８：０６：０３３１ＳＮＣ６２００１４５

Playing a Disc
CD ICON
POWER/VOLUME JOYSTICK
KNOB
OPEN BUTTON
CD BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE BAR
RANDOM FAST FORWARD SKIP＋BUTTON

BUTTON BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON REWIND BUTTON SKIP−BUTTON

０７／０８／０７１８：０６：１６３１ＳＮＣ６２００１４６
To Play a Disc Video CDs and DVD discs do not The specifications for compatible
You operate the disc player with the work in this unit. WMA files are:
same controls used for the radio. To −Sampling frequency:
load or play discs, the ignition switch The specifications for compatible 32/44.1/48 kHz
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or MP3 files are: −Bit rate:
ON (II) position. −Sampling frequency: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) −Compatible with variable bit rate
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2) and multi-session
Features
−Bit rate: −Maximum layers
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ (including ROOT): 8 layers
The label can curl up and cause the 160/192/224/256/320 kbps
disc to jam in the unit. (MPEG1) NOTE:
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
This audio system can also play CD- 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2) protected by digital rights
Rs and CD-RWs compressed in MP3 −Compatible with variable bit rate management (DRM), the audio unit
or WMA formats. When playing a and multi-session displays CD FORMAT, and then
disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ on −Maximum layers skips to the next file.
the screen. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’ (including ROOT): 8 layers
will appear on the screen. You can
select up to 99 folders and play up to
999 tracks. If the disc has a complex
structure, it takes a while to read the
disc before the system begins to play
it.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：０６：２３３１ＳＮＣ６２００１４７
To Load a Disc
DISC SLOT
OPEN BUTTON CLOSE BUTTON
The disc player is behind the Insert a disc about halfway into the To return the screen to the upright
navigation screen. To use the disc disc slot. The drive will pull the disc position, press the CLOSE button on
player, press the OPEN button in the rest of the way and begin to the edge of the screen panel. Do not
beside the screen. The screen folds play it. use the folded screen as a tray. If
back, and the disc player appears. you put a cup, for example, on the
You cannot load and play 3-inch screen, the liquid inside the cup may
(8-cm) discs in this system. spill on the screen when you go over
a bump.

０７／０８／０７１８：０６：３２３１ＳＮＣ６２００１４８
Push the AUDIO button beside the To Change or Select Tracks/Files You can also select an icon with the
screen to show the audio display and joystick. Move it to left, right, up, or
operate the disc player. PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION down to change the highlighting and
scroll through lists. Then press the
You can also operate the audio ENT on the top of the joystick to
system without using the control select the icon.
icons on the audio screen. Press the
CD button. The status bar appears SKIP − Each time you press and
Features
on the bottom of the screen. On the release (preset 6), the player
navigation screen, you can see the skips forward to the beginning of the
audio information whenever you next track (file in MP3 or WMA
touch the AUDIO INFO icon on the mode). Press and release
lower portion of the screen. PRESET BUTTONS (preset 5), to skip backward to
the beginning of the current track.
When playing a CD recorded with You can use the preset buttons while Press it again to skip to the
text data, the track, album, and artist a disc is playing to select passages beginning of the previous track.
name are shown on the audio display. and change tracks (files in MP3 or
When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA, WMA mode). Each preset button’s FF/REW − To move rapidly within
the folder number and name, the file function is shown on the bottom of a track/file, press and hold
number and name, the artist name, the screen. (preset 4) or (preset 3).
and the elapsed time are shown. The
system will continuously play a disc
until you change modes. If the disc
was not recorded with text data, it
will not be displayed.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：０６：３９３１ＳＮＣ６２００１４９
In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER SELECTION − To FOLDER REPEAT − This feature, FOLDER RANDOM − This
select a different folder, press either when activated, replays all files on feature, when activated, plays all
side of the TUNE bar to move to the the selected folder in the order they files in each folder in random order,
beginning of the next folder. Press are compressed. To activate folder rather than in the order they are
the ▲ side of the TUNE bar to skip repeat, press and hold the RPT compressed. To activate folder
to the next folder, and the ▼ side to button (preset 1). You will see random, press the RDM button
move to the beginning of the current FOLDER REPEAT in the display. (preset 2) twice. You will see
folder. Press it again to skip to the The system continuously replays the FOLDER RANDOM in the display.
beginning of the previous folder. current folder. Press the RPT button The system then selects and plays
again to turn it off. Pressing the files randomly. This continues until
TRACK REPEAT (FILE RDM button or selecting a different you deactivate folder random by
REPEAT) − To continuously replay folder with the TUNE bar also turns pressing the RDM button again, or if
a track (file in MP3 or WMA mode), off folder repeat. you select a different folder with the
press and release the RPT button TUNE bar.
(preset 1). You will see TRACK TRACK RANDOM (Random
REPEAT in the display. Press and within a disc/folder) − This
hold the RPT button for 2 seconds to feature plays the tracks within a disc
turn it off. (the files within a folder) in random
order. To activate track random,
press and release the RDM button
(preset 2). You will see TRACK
RANDOM in the display. Press and
hold the RDM button for 2 seconds
to return to normal play.

０７／０８／０７１８：０６：４７３１ＳＮＣ６２００１５０
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) − In MP3 or WMA mode Using a Track List

The scan function samples all tracks FOLDER SCAN − This feature,
(files in MP3 or WMA) in the order when activated, samples all the first FOLDER ICON TRACK/FILE ICON
they were recorded. To activate scan, files in each folder on the disc in
press and release the SCAN button. order. To activate folder scan, press
You will see TRACK SCAN in the and hold the SCAN button. You will
display. You will get a 10 second see FOLDER SCAN in the display.
sampling of each track/file on the
Features
disc. Press and hold the SCAN The system plays the first file in
button for 2 seconds to get out of each folder for about 10 seconds. If
scan mode and play the last track/ you do nothing, the system then
file sampled. plays the first file in each folder for
10 seconds each. After playing the FOLDER NUMBER RETURN ICON
Pressing either SKIP button (preset first file of the last folder, the system
5 or 6) also turns off scan. goes to normal playing. You can also select a track/file
directly from a track list on the audio
Pressing either SKIP button (preset display. Press the AUDIO button to
5 or 6), or selecting a different folder show the audio display, then touch
with the TUNE bar, or pressing the the Track List icon. The track list
SCAN button, also turns off folder menu appears on the display.
scan.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：０６：５６３１ＳＮＣ６２００１５１
When playing a CD recorded with To Stop Playing a Disc Removing a Disc

text data, each track name is shown To play the radio when a disc is To remove a disc from the audio unit,
on the audio display. With a disc playing, press the AM/FM button or fold back the screen by pressing the
recorded in MP3 or WMA, the folder touch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or OPEN button (see page 142 ). Press
number and the location are also XM2 icon. If a PC card is in the audio the disc eject button ( ) to
displayed. unit, touch the CARD icon to play remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
the PC card. Press the CD button but do not remove it from the slot,
If the disc was not recorded with text again or touch the CD icon to switch the system will automatically reload
data, only the track number is shown. back to the disc player. it after 10 seconds and put it in pause
mode. To begin playing, press the
To scroll through the display, touch If you turn the system off while a CD button.
the ▲ or ▼ icon on the side of the disc is playing, either with the
screen. To go back to the previous power/volume knob or by turning To return the screen to the upright
display, touch the Return icon on the off the ignition switch, the disc will position, press the CLOSE button.
screen. stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin You cannot close the screen if a disc
Select the desired track/file by playing where it left off. is partially inserted into its slot.
touching the icon on the display. The
selected icon will be highlighted in You can also eject the disc when the
blue. The system begins to play the ignition switch is off.
selected track/file. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, touch the folder icon
on the upper left of the screen to
move to the parent folder. The
current folder is highlighted in blue.

０７／０８／０７１８：０７：０４３１ＳＮＣ６２００１５２
Operating the Optional Disc Protecting Discs

Changer For information on how to handle
An optional six or eight disc changer and protect discs, see page 163 .
is available for your vehicle. This
disc changer uses the same controls
used for the in-dash disc player or
the radio.
Features
Load the desired discs in the
magazine, and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
To select the disc changer, press the

CD/AUX button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different disc, use either side of the
TUNE bar. To select the previous
disc, press the ▲ side. To select the
next disc, press the ▼ side.
If you select an empty slot in the

magazine, the changer will search
for the next available disc to load and
play.

０７／０８／０７１８：０７：１２３１ＳＮＣ６２００１５３
Disc Player Error Messages

The chart on the right explains the Error Cause Solution
error messages you may see in the Message
display while playing a disc. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc
If you see an error message in the FOCUS Error player.
display while playing a disc, press Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
the eject button. After ejecting the For more information, see page 164.
disc, check it for damage or Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
deformation. If there is no damage, Check the disc for damage or deformation.
insert the disc again. Mechanical Error For more information, see page 164.
If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the error
If there is still a problem, the error message does not disappear after the disc is
message will appear again. Press the ejected, see your dealer.
eject button, and pull out the disc. TOC Error Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
Insert a different disc. If the new High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
disc plays, there is a problem with normal.

０７／０８／０７１８：０７：１８３１ＳＮＣ６２００１５４
Playing a PC Card
TRACK LIST ICON PC CARD ICON
JOYSTICK
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
Features
PLAY MODE
OPEN BUTTON ICON
CD/XM BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE BAR
RANDOM FAST FORWARD SKIP ＋ BUTTON

BUTTON BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON REWIND BUTTON SKIP − BUTTON

０７／０８／０７１８：０７：３０３１ＳＮＣ６２００１５５
To Play a PC Card Always use the recommended Never insert foreign objects into
You operate the PC card player with memory card with the appropriate the PC card slot.
the same controls used for the radio adapter (if an adapter is needed).
and the disc player. To load or play a Some memory cards will not work in The specifications for compatible
card, the ignition switch must be in this unit. MP3 files are:
the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) −Sampling frequency:
position. NOTE: 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
When you insert a PC card into 24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
The PC card player reads and plays the slot, make sure you put it in −Bit rate:
cards in MP3 or WMA formats. straight. If you cannot insert it, 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
Depending on the format, the screen remove it, and insert again. 160/192/224/256/320 kbps
will indicate ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ when (MPEG1)
a card is playing. The card limit of Do not keep PC cards in the 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
the player is 99 folders and 999 vehicle. Direct sunlight and high 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
tracks. If the card has a complex heat will damage them. −Compatible with variable bit rate
structure, it takes some time for the and multi-session
system to begin playing it. To avoid damaging the card −Maximum layers
reader, do not insert hard disc (including ROOT): 8 layers
Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2, drive cards into the PC card slot.
the recommended PC cards for the
PC card reader are: You cannot close the screen
(move it to the upright position)
CompactFlash until the PC card is inserted all the
Flash ATA way into its slot or removed.
SD memory card

０７／０８／０７１８：０７：４１３１ＳＮＣ６２００１５６
The specifications for compatible Loading a PC Card Insert a PC card straight into the slot.
WMA files are: The drive will read the PC card and
−Sampling frequency: PC CARD SLOT begin to play it.
32/44.1/48 kHz
−Bit rate: Return the screen to the upright
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps position by pressing the CLOSE
−Compatible with variable bit rate button on the edge of the screen
and multi-session panel.
Features
−Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers Push the AUDIO button beside the
screen to show the audio display and
In WMA format, DRM (digital rights operate the PC card player.
management) files cannot be played.
If the system finds a DRM file, it You can also operate the audio
skips that file and plays the next The PC card slot is behind the system without using the control
available folder or file. navigation screen. To use the PC icons on the audio screen. Press any
card player, press the OPEN button of the appropriate control buttons.
beside the screen. The screen folds The status bar appears on the
back, and the PC card slot appears. bottom of the screen. On the
navigation screen, you can see the
audio information whenever you
touch the AUDIO INFO icon on the
screen.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：０７：５１３１ＳＮＣ６２００１５７
To Select a Play Mode

There are three play modes: Folder, FOLDER MODE
PLAY MODE ICON
Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAY
MODE icon, then choose one of the
modes by touching its icon. When a MODE INDICATOR
mode is selected, it is highlighted in
blue.
Folder mode plays tracks in the

order they were added to the card.
Artist mode plays tracks in
alphabetical order, by artist and
song title.
Album mode plays albums PLAY MODE ICON PLAY MODE ICON
(folders) in alphabetical order. ARTIST MODE ALBUM MODE
If play mode information was not

included in the tracks when they
were added to the card, it will not be
displayed on the screen.
To select a play mode, push the

AUDIO button to show the audio
display, then touch the PLAY MODE
icon on the display. MODE INDICATOR MODE INDICATOR

０７／０８／０７１８：０７：５８３１ＳＮＣ６２００１５８
If you select ‘‘Play a New Track List,’’

the system goes into the selected
play mode immediately and begins to
play the files in order to the new list.
To go back to the previous screen,

press the CANCEL button on the
right side of the screen. To exit the
Features
play mode screens, press the AUDIO
button.
Select the desired mode by touching After you select the play mode, the
the appropriate icon, or move the display changes to the selectable
joystick, then press the ENT. playing menu. If you select
‘‘Continue playing the Current Song,’’
the system goes into the selected
play mode after playing the current
file.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：０８：０７３１ＳＮＣ６２００１５９
To Change or Select Tracks/Files SKIP − Each time you press and TRACK REPEAT (FILE
release (preset 6), the player REPEAT) − To continuously replay
PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION skips forward to the beginning of the a file, press and release the RPT
next file. Press and release button (preset 1). You will see
(preset 5), to skip backward to TRACK REPEAT in the display.
the beginning of the current file. Press the RPT button again to turn it
Press it again to skip to the off.
beginning of the previous file.
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
FF/REW − To move rapidly within REPEAT − This feature, when
a file, press and hold (preset 4) activated, replays all the files on the
or (preset 3). selected folder/artist/album in the
PRESET BUTTONS order they are recorded or listed. To
FOLDER SELECTION − To activate each repeat mode, press and
You can use the preset buttons while select a different folder, press either hold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2
a card is playing to select or change side of the TUNE bar to move the seconds. You will see FOLDER
files. Each preset button’s function is beginning of the next folder. Press REPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT or
shown on the bottom of the screen. the ▲ side of the TUNE bar to skip ALBUM REPEAT in the display.
the next folder, and to the ▼ side to The system continuously replays the
Icons on the screen can also be move the beginning of the current current folder/artist/album. Press
selected with the joystick. Move the folder. Press it again to skip to the and hold the RPT button for 2
joystick left or right and up or down beginning of the previous folder. seconds again to turn it off. Pressing
until the icon is highlighted, then the RDM button, or selecting a
press the ENT on the top of the different folder/artist/album with
joystick to select the icon. the TUNE bar also turns off the
repeat feature.

０７／０８／０７１８：０８：１４３１ＳＮＣ６２００１６０
TRACK RANDOM (Random The system then selects and plays FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
within a folder) − This feature files randomly. This continues until SCAN − This feature, when
plays the files within a folder in you deactivate each random play by activated, samples the first file in
random order. To activate track pressing the RDM button again, or each folder/artist/album on the PC
random, press and release the RDM you select a different folder/artist/ card in order. To activate each scan
button (preset 2). You will see album with the TUNE bar. feature, press and hold the SCAN
TRACK RANDOM in the display. button until you hear a beep. You will
Press and hold the RDM button for 2 SCAN − The scan function samples see FOLDER SCAN, ARTIST SCAN
Features
seconds to return to normal play. all files on the PC card in the order or ALBUM SCAN in the display.
they are recorded. To activate scan,
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM press and release the SCAN button. The system plays the first file in the
RANDOM − This feature, when You will see TRACK SCAN in the folder for about 10 seconds. If you do
activated, plays all files in each display. You will get a 10 second nothing, the system plays the first
folder/artist/album in random order, sampling of each file on the PC card. file in each folder, in order, for 10
rather than in the order they are Press and hold the SCAN button for seconds each. After playing the first
recorded or listed. To activate each 2 seconds to get out of scan mode file of the last folder/artist/album,
random play, press the RDM button and play the last file sampled. the system returns to normal play.
(preset 2) 2 times. You will see
FOLDER RANDOM, ARTIST Pressing either of the SKIP buttons Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
RANDOM or ALBUM RANDOM in (preset 5 or 6) also turns off the scan (preset 5 or 6), selecting a different
the display. feature. folder/artist/album with the TUNE
bar, or pressing the SCAN button,
also turns off the scan feature.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：０８：２３３１ＳＮＣ６２００１６１
Using a Track List
FOLDER ICON ARTIST NAME
TRACK LIST ICON RETURN ICON
You can also select a file directly To scroll through the display, touch In artist mode, the artist name is also
from a track list on the audio display. the ▲ or ▼ icon on the side of the displayed on the right side of each
Press the AUDIO button to show the screen. To go back to the previous selectable icon. Select the desired
audio display, then touch the Track display, touch the Return icon. file.
List icon. The track list menu
appears on the display. To play a file, touch its icon on the
screen. In folder mode, touch the
folder icon on the upper left of the
screen to move to the parent folder.
The current folder is highlighted in
blue.

０７／０８／０７１８：０８：３１３１ＳＮＣ６２００１６２
Song Search Function
ALBUM NAME SONG SEARCH ICON TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON
Features
RETURN ICON
Folder mode is shown. ARTIST ICON ALBUM ICON
In album mode, the album name is When you select ‘‘Song Search’’ from You can then select any of three
also displayed on the right side of the track list display, the song search modes to search a file: Title by
each selectable icon. Select the menu appears. Keyword, Artist, and Album.
desired file.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：０８：３９３１ＳＮＣ６２００１６３
Searching for a Song Title by Keyword To cancel the selected letter, select Searching for a Song by Artist Name
the letter and touch the Delete icon.
MORE ICON To select more characters, touch the ARTIST LIST
More icon. The other character list
will be shown.
FILE LIST
DELETE ICON LIST ICON
In Title by Keyword mode, enter the Select the Artist icon, and the artist
title name, or any keyword, by list appears. Select the desired artist,
touching the letter icons on the and the artist’s file list is displayed.
screen. Press the List icon to begin
the song search. If you press the After the system searches for a song,
CANCEL button on the screen, the a file list is displayed. To scroll
display returns to the mode menu through the list, touch the ▲ or ▼
without doing a search. icon on the side of the screen. Select
the desired file by touching the
appropriate icon, or moving the
joystick and pressing the ENT.

０７／０８／０７１８：０８：４９３１ＳＮＣ６２００１６４
Searching for a Song by Album Name To Stop Playing a PC Card Removing a PC Card
To play the radio when a PC card is To remove a PC card from the audio
ALBUM LIST playing, press the AM/FM button or unit, fold back the screen by
touch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or pressing the OPEN button (see page
XM2 icon. If a disc is in the audio 142 ). Press the eject button ( )
unit, press the CD button or touch to remove the card. If you do not
the CD icon to play the disc. Touch remove it from the slot, you cannot
the CARD icon to switch back to the return the screen to the upright
Features
PC card player. position.
If you turn the system off while a PC To return the screen to the upright
card is playing, either with the position, press the CLOSE button.
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the card will You can also eject a card when the
Select the Album icon, and the stay in the drive. When you turn the ignition switch is off.
album list appears. Select the desired system back on, the card will begin
album, and its song list is displayed. playing where it left off. PC Card Player Malfunction
You can then select the desired song If there is a problem with the PC
from the list. When you leave the vehicle, always card player, see your dealer.
remove the PC card from the audio
unit.

０７／０８／０７１８：０８：５４３１ＳＮＣ６２００１６５
PC Card Error Messages

If you see an error message in the Indication Solution
display while playing a PC card, find
the solution in the chart to the right. FILE ERROR The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the disc. There
If you cannot clear the error is a possibility that the files have been damaged.
message, take your vehicle to your NO MUSIC It appears when the PC card is empty or there are no MP3 or WMA
dealer. files in the PC card. Save the MP3 or WMA files in the PC card.
MEDIA ERROR It appears when the unsupported PC card is inserted. The system
supports CF card, Flash ATA card, and SanDisk 6-in-1 Card Adapter.

０７／０８／０７１８：０９：０３３１ＳＮＣ６２００１６６
AM/FM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations
AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such
Those bands cover these frequen- as the distance from the station’s
cies: transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz A radio station’s signal gets weaker
Features
as you get farther away from its
Radio stations on the AM band are transmitter. If you are listening to an
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz AM station, you will notice the sound
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the volume becoming weaker, and the
FM band are assigned frequencies at station drifting in and out. If you are
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). listening to an FM station, you will Driving very near the transmitter of
see the stereo indicator flickering off a station that is broadcasting on a
Stations must use these exact and on as the signal weakens. frequency close to the frequency of
frequencies. It is fairly common for Eventually, the stereo indicator will the station you are listening to can
stations to round-off the frequency in go off and the sound will fade also affect your radio’s reception.
their advertising, so your radio could completely as you get out of range of You may temporarily hear both
display a frequency of 100.9 even the station’s signal. stations, or hear only the station you
though the announcer may identify are close to.
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：０９：０９３１ＳＮＣ６２００１６７
AM/FM Radio Reception
Electrical interference from passing

vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by

band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the station’s transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.

０７／０８／０７１８：０９：１８３１ＳＮＣ６２００１６８
Protecting Your Discs
General Information Protecting Discs

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, When a disc is not being played,
use only high quality discs labeled store it in its case to protect it from
for audio use. dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
When recording a CD-R or direct sunlight and extreme heat.
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Features
system. Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
Play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped discs may jam in the A new disc may be rough on the
drive or cause other problems. inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a disc by its edges; never
Handle your discs properly to can flake off and fall on the touch either surface. Do not place
prevent damage and skipping. recording surface of the disc, stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
causing skipping or other problems. These, along with contamination
Remove these pieces by rubbing the from finger prints, liquids, and felt-
inner and outer edges with the side tip pens, can cause the disc to not
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. of a pencil or pen. play properly, or possibly jam in the
The label can curl up and cause the drive.
disc to jam in the unit. Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc player.

０７／０８／０７１８：０９：２９３１ＳＮＣ６２００１６９
Additional Information of 1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs

Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player/changer has
a sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown Bubbled/ With Label/ Using Printer Sealed With Plastic
to the right: Wrinkled Sticker Label Kit Ring
2. Damaged discs 3. Poor quality discs
Chipped/ Warped Burrs

Cracked

０７／０８／０７１８：０９：４０３１ＳＮＣ６２００１７０
4. Small, irregular shaped discs 5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
Features
3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape Audio unit may not play the
Fingerprints, scratches, etc. following formats.
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due

to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the

discs may cause the sound to skip.
Can Shape Arrow Shape

０７／０８／０７１８：０９：４５３１ＳＮＣ６２００１７１
Radio Theft Protection
Your vehicle’s audio system will If you lose the card, you must obtain If you make a mistake entering the
disable itself if it is disconnected the code number from a dealer. To code, do not start over; complete the
from electrical power for any reason. do this, you will need the system’s five-digit (except for model with
To make it work again, you must serial number. navigation system)/four-digit (model
enter a specific five-digit code with navigation system) sequence,
(except for model with navigation If your vehicle’s battery is then enter the correct code. You
system)/four-digit code (model with disconnected or goes dead, or the have 10 tries to enter the correct
navigation system) in the preset radio fuse is removed, the audio code. If you are unsuccessful in 10
buttons. Because there are hundreds system will disable itself. Use the attempts, you must then leave the
of number combinations possible preset buttons to enter the five-digit system on for 1 hour before trying
from five or four-digits, making the code (except for model with again.
system work without knowing the navigation system)/four-digit code
exact code is nearly impossible. (model with navigation system). The
code is on the radio code card
You should have received a card that included in your owner’s manual kit.
lists your audio system’s code and When it is entered correctly, the
serial numbers. It is best to store this radio will start playing.
card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.

０７／０８／０７１８：０９：５５３１ＳＮＣ６２００１７２
Remote Audio Controls
The MODE button changes the beginning of the current track. Press
VOL BUTTON
mode. Pressing the button it again to return to the previous
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, track. You will see the disc and track
disc (if a disc is loaded), or a PC card numbers in the display. If you press
(if it is loaded). On models with and hold the CH button (＋) or (−)
satellite radio system, you can also until you hear a beep, you can select
select XM radio. a different folder.
Features
If you are listening to the radio, use On models with navigation system
the CH button to change stations. To use the voice control system,
Each time you press the top (＋) of refer to the navigation system
CH BUTTON MODE BUTTON the button, the system goes to the manual.
next preset station on the band you
Three controls for the audio system are listening to. Press the bottom Auxiliary Input Jack
are mounted in the steering wheel (−) to go back to the previous The auxiliary input jack is under the
hub. These let you control basic station. If you press and hold the CH accessory power socket. The system
functions without removing your button (＋) or (−) until you hear a will accept auxiliary input from
hand from the wheel. beep, the system goes into the seek standard audio accessories.
mode. It finds a station with a strong
The VOL button adjusts the volume signal. When a compatible audio unit is
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top connected to the jack, press the AUX
or bottom of the button, hold it until If you are playing a disc, the system button to select it.
the desired volume is reached, then skips to the beginning of the next
release it. track each time you press the top
(＋) of the CH button. Press the
bottom (−) to return to the

０７／０８／０７１８：１０：０３３１ＳＮＣ６２００１７３
Setting the Clock
On models without navigation system

To set the time, press the CLOCK CLOCK BUTTON
button until the displayed time
begins to blink, then release the
button.
Change the hours by pressing the H

(preset 1) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M
(preset 2) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.
Press the CLOCK button again to HOUR BUTTON RESET BUTTON

enter the set time.
MINUTE BUTTON
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00 On models with navigation system
before the half hour, pressing the 1:52 will reset to 2:00 The navigation system receives
CLOCK button until you hear a beep, signals from the global positioning
then pressing the R (preset 3) button system (GPS), and the displayed
sets the clock back to the previous time is updated automatically by the
hour. If the displayed time is after GPS. Refer to the navigation system
the half hour, the clock sets forward manual for how to adjust the time.
to the beginning of the next hour.

０７／０８／０７１８：１０：１１３１ＳＮＣ６２００１７４
Security System
The security system helps to protect With the system set, you can still
your vehicle and valuables from theft. open the trunk with the master key
The horn sounds and a combination or the remote transmitter without
of headlights (low beam), parking triggering the alarm. The alarm will
lights, side marker lights, and sound if the trunk lock is forced, or
taillights flash if someone attempts the trunk is opened with the trunk
to break into your vehicle or remove release handle.
the radio. This alarm continues for 2
Features
minutes, then it stops. To reset an The security system will not set if
alarming system before the 2 the hood, trunk, or any door is not
minutes have elapsed, unlock the fully closed. If the system will not set,
driver’s door with the key or the SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR check the door and trunk open
remote transmitter. indicators on the instrument panel
Once the security system is set, (see page 60 ) to see if the doors and
The security system automatically opening any door, the trunk, or the trunk are fully closed. Since it is not
sets 15 seconds after you lock the hood without using the key or the part of the monitor display, manually
doors, hood, and trunk. For the remote transmitter will cause it to check the hood.
system to activate, you must lock the alarm. It also alarms if the radio is
doors from the outside with the key, removed from the dashboard or the NOTE: To see if the system is set
driver’s lock tab, door lock master wiring is cut. after you exit the vehicle, press the
switch, or remote transmitter. The LOCK button on the remote
security system indicator on the transmitter within 5 seconds. If the
instrument panel starts blinking system is set, the horn will beep
immediately to show you the system once.
is setting itself. Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.

０７／０８／０７１８：１０：１９３１ＳＮＣ６２００１７５
Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain Using the Cruise Control 3. Press and release the SET/
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) DECEL button on the steering
without keeping your foot on the CRUISE BUTTON RES/ACCEL wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTON
accelerator pedal. It should be used indicator on the instrument panel
for cruising on straight, open CANCEL comes on to show the system is
highways. It is not recommended for BUTTON now activated.
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather. Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
SET/DECEL
Improper use of the cruise BUTTON slow down. This will cancel cruise
control can lead to a crash. control. To resume the set speed,
press the RES/ACCEL button. The
Use the cruise control only 1. Push the CRUISE button on the indicator on the instrument panel will
when traveling on open steering wheel. The CRUISE come back on.
highways in good weather. MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on. When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising downshift to hold the set speed.
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

０７／０８／０７１８：１０：２７３１ＳＮＣ６２００１７６
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising Even with the cruise control turned
You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways: on, you can still use the accelerator
speed in any of these ways: pedal to speed up for passing. After
Press and hold the SET/DECEL completing the pass, take your foot
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. Release the button when off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
button. When you reach the you reach the desired speed. will return to the set cruising speed.
desired cruising speed, release the
button. To slow down in very small Resting your foot on the brake pedal
Features
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL causes cruise control to cancel.
To increase your speed in very button. Each time you do this,
small amounts, tap the RES/ your vehicle will slow down about
ACCEL button. Each time you do 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
this, the vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
Push on the accelerator pedal. CONTROL indicator on the
Accelerate to the desired cruising instrument panel will go out.
speed, then press the SET/ When the vehicle slows to the
DECEL button. desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.

０７／０８／０７１８：１０：３４３１ＳＮＣ６２００１７７
Cruise Control
Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed

When you push the CANCEL button,
CRUISE BUTTON or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
system will remember the previously
set cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h), and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
CANCEL same cruising speed as before.
BUTTON
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system off and erases the
You can cancel cruise control in any previous cruising speed.
of these ways:
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the

steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the

steering wheel.

０７／０８／０７１８：１０：３８３１ＳＮＣ６２００１７８
Main Menu
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period .............................. 174

vehicle, you should know what Fuel Recommendation .................. 174
gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures .......... 175
levels of important fluids. You also Refueling..................................... 175
need to know how to properly store Opening and Closing the
luggage or packages. The Hood ........................................ 176
information in this section will help Oil Check .................................... 177
you. If you plan to add any Engine Coolant Check .............. 178
accessories to your vehicle, please Fuel Economy ................................ 179
read the information in this section Accessories and Modifications .... 182
Before Driving
first. Carrying Cargo .............................. 184

０７／０８／０７１８：１０：４９３１ＳＮＣ６２００１７９
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation Use of gasoline with these additives

Help assure your vehicle’s future Your vehicle is designed to operate may adversely affect performance,
reliability and performance by paying on unleaded gasoline with a pump and cause the malfunction indicator
extra attention to how you drive octane number of 87 or higher. Use lamp on your instrument panel to
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). of a lower octane gasoline can cause come on. If this happens, contact
During this period: a persistent, heavy metallic rapping your authorized dealer for service.
noise that can lead to engine damage.
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid Some gasoline today is blended with
acceleration. We recommend using quality oxygenates such as ethanol or
gasolines containing detergent MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
Do not change the oil until the additives that help prevent fuel operate on oxygenated gasoline
scheduled maintenance time. system and engine deposits. containing up to 10% ethanol by
volume and up to 15% MTBE by
Avoid hard braking for the first In addition, in order to maintain good volume. Do not use gasoline
200 miles (300 km). performance, fuel economy, and containing methanol.
emissions control, we strongly
You should also follow these recommend, in areas where it is If you notice any undesirable
recommendations with an available, the use of gasoline that operating symptoms, try another
overhauled or exchanged engine, or does NOT contain manganese-based service station or switch to another
when the brakes are replaced. fuel additives such as MMT. brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related

information, please refer to your
Quick Start Guide.

０７／０８／０７１８：１０：５８３１ＳＮＣ６２００１８０
Service Station Procedures
Refueling 3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.

You may hear a hissing sound as
Push Gasoline is highly flammable pressure inside the tank escapes.
and explosive. You can be The fuel fill cap is attached to the
burned or seriously injured fuel filler with a tether. Place the
when handling fuel. cap in the holder on the fuel fill
door.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away. 4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
Handle fuel only outdoors. nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
Before Driving
Wipe up spills immediately. not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
1. Park with the driver’s side closest If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
to the service station pump. even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
2. To open the fuel fill door, push vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
down the lever on the left of the system. The system helps keep
driver’s seat. fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
TETHER
HOLDER FUEL FILL CAP
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：１１：０６３１ＳＮＣ６２００１８１
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on Opening and Closing the Hood
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap, HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCH
the malfunction indicator lamp
may come on (see page 255 ). You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display.
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until

it latches.
1. Park the vehicle, and set the If the hood latch handle moves
parking brake. Pull the hood stiffly, or if you can open the hood
release handle located under the without lifting the handle, the
lower left corner of the dashboard. mechanism should be cleaned and
The hood will pop up slightly. lubricated.
2. Put your fingers under the front 3. Holding the grip, pull the support
edge of the hood near the center. rod out of its clip. Insert the end
Slide your hand to the left until into the designated hole in the
you feel the hood latch handle. hood.
Push this handle up to release it.
Lift up the hood.

０７／０８／０７１８：１１：１６３１ＳＮＣ６２００１８２
Oil Check
SUPPORT ROD GRIP DIPSTICK
Before Driving
UPPER MARK
CLIP LOWER MARK
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to Wait a few minutes after turning the 4. Remove the dipstick again, and
remove the support rod from the engine off before you check the oil. check the level. It should be
hole. Put the support rod back into between the upper and lower
its holding clip. Lower the hood to 1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop). marks.
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it 2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean If it is near or below the lower mark,
is securely latched. cloth or paper towel. see Adding Engine Oil on page 215 .
3. Insert the dipstick all the way back

into its hole.

０７／０８／０７１８：１１：２１３１ＳＮＣ６２００１８３
Engine Coolant Check Refer to Owner’s Maintenance

Checks on page 212 for information
RESERVE TANK about checking other items on your
vehicle.
MAX
MIN
Look at the coolant level in the

radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 218 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.

０７／０８／０７１８：１１：３１３１ＳＮＣ６２００１８４
Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel

Economy Estimates Comparison.
Fuel economy is not a fixed number. City MPG Highway MPG
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments. Combined Fuel Estimated Annual
Economy Fuel Cost
Before Driving
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shown in the example to the right (Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA achieved is also provided. Estimated Annual Fuel Cost −
estimates include: Provides an estimated annual fuel
Combined Fuel Economy − cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
City MPG − Represents urban Represents a combination of city and km) per year multiplied by the cost
driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A highway driving. The scale per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost
range of miles per gallon achieved is represents the range of combined data) divided by the combined fuel
also provided. fuel economy for other vehicles in economy.
the class.
Highway MPG − Represents a For more information on fuel
mixture of rural and interstate economy ratings and factors that
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle, affect fuel economy, visit www.
typical of longer trips in free-flowing fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visit www.
traffic. A range of miles per gallon vehicles.gc.ca)

０７／０８／０７１８：１１：４４３１ＳＮＣ６２００１８５
Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscosity Observe the speed limit −
The following factors can lower your motor oil, displaying the API Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
vehicle’s fuel economy: Certification Seal (see page on fuel mileage at speeds above 45
Aggressive driving (hard 215). mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
acceleration and braking) Maintain proper tire inflation speed and you reduce the drag.
Excessive idling, accelerating and − An under-inflated tire increases Trailers, car top carriers, roof
braking in stop-and-go traffic ‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces racks and bike racks are also big
Cold engine operation (engines fuel economy. contributors to increased drag.
are more efficient when warmed Avoid carrying excess weight in Always drive in the highest gear
up) your vehicle − It puts a heavier possible − If your vehicle has a
Driving with a heavy load or the load on the engine, increasing fuel manual transmission, you can
air conditioner running consumption. boost your fuel economy by up
Improperly inflated tires Keep your vehicle clean − In shifting as early as possible.
particular, a build-up of snow or Avoid excessive idling − Idling
Improving Fuel Economy mud on your vehicle’s underside results in 0 miles per gallon.
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Vehicle Maintenance Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
A properly maintained vehicle economy.
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce Drive Efficiently
fuel economy. Always maintain your Drive moderately − Rapid
vehicle according to the maintenance acceleration, abrupt cornering,
messages displayed on the multi- and hard braking increase fuel
information display (see Owner’s consumption.
Maintenance Checks on page 212 ).
For example:

０７／０８／０７１８：１１：５３３１ＳＮＣ６２００１８６
Fuel Economy
Minimize the use of the air Checking Your Fuel Economy

conditioning system − The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible. Miles Gallons Miles per
Plan and combine trips − driven of fuel Gallon
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
Before Driving
L per
100 Liter Kilometers
100 km
Calculating Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy. 1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking 2) Reset trip counter to zero.
fuel gauge readings are NOT 3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
accurate measures of fuel economy. 4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles.

０７／０８／０７１８：１２：０１３１ＳＮＣ６２００１８７
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:

some non-Honda accessories, can Make sure the accessory does not
make it unsafe. Before you make any Improper accessories or obscure any lights, or interfere
modifications or add any accessories, modifications can affect your with proper vehicle operation or
be sure to read the following vehicle’s handling, stability, and performance.
information. performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt Be sure electronic accessories do
Accessories or killed. not overload electrical circuits
Your dealer has Honda accessories (see page 257 ) or interfere with
that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this the proper operation of your
vehicle. These accessories have owner’s manual regarding vehicle.
been designed and approved for your accessories and modifications.
vehicle, and are covered by warranty. Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
Although non-Honda accessories When properly installed, cellular contact your dealer for assistance.
may fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and If possible, have your dealer
meet factory specifications, and low-powered audio systems should inspect the final installation.
could adversely affect your vehicle’s not interfere with your vehicle’s
handling and stability. computer controlled systems, such Do not install accessories on the
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and side pillars or across the rear
tire pressure monitoring system (if windows. Accessories installed in
equipped). these areas may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.

０７／０８／０７１８：１２：０８３１ＳＮＣ６２００１８８
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle Non-Honda wheels, because they

Removing parts from your vehicle, are a universal design, can cause
or replacing components with excessive stress on suspension
non-Honda components could components and will not be
seriously affect your vehicle’s compatible with the tire pressure
handling, stability, and reliability. monitoring system (TPMS)＊.
Some examples are: Larger or smaller wheels and tires

can interfere with the operation of
Lowering your vehicle with a your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
Before Driving
non-Honda suspension kit that other systems.
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the Modifying your steering wheel or
undercarriage to hit speed bumps any other part of your vehicle’s
or other raised objects, which safety features can make the
could cause the airbags to deploy. systems ineffective.
Raising your vehicle with a If you plan to modify your vehicle,

non-Honda suspension kit can consult your dealer.
affect the handling and stability.
＊ : If equipped

０７／０８／０７１８：１２：１５３１ＳＮＣ６２００１８９
Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient

DOOR POCKETS storage areas:
Glove box
CENTER POCKET Door pockets
TRUNK Center pocket
Console compartment
Trunk
However, carrying too much cargo,

or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT GLOVE BOX

０７／０８／０７１８：１２：２７３１ＳＮＣ６２００１９０
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits (4)The resulting figure equals the

The maximum load for your vehicle available amount of cargo and
is 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. vehicles, Overloading or improper luggage load capacity. For
and 395 kg for Canadian vehicles. loading can affect handling and example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
stability and cause a crash in equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
See Tire And Loading Information which you can be hurt or killed. five 150 lb. passengers in your
label attached to the driver’s vehicle, the amount of available
doorjamb. Follow all load limits and other cargo and luggage load capacity is
loading guidelines in this 650 lbs.
Label Example manual. (1,400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
Before Driving
Steps for Determining Correct Load (5)Determine the combined weight
Limit − of luggage and cargo being loaded
(1)Locate the statement ‘‘The on the vehicle. That weight may
combined weight of occupants and not safely exceed the available
cargo should never exceed XXX cargo and luggage load capacity
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s calculated in Step 4.
placard.
This figure includes the total weight (6)If your vehicle will be towing a
of all occupants, cargo, and (2)Determine the combined weight trailer, load from your trailer will
accessories, and the tongue load if of the driver and passenger that be transferred to your vehicle.
you are towing a trailer. will be riding in your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
(3)Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity of
the driver and passengers from your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs. CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：１２：３８３１ＳＮＣ６２００１９１
Carrying Cargo
In addition, the total weight of the

vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
Example 1 not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Max Load (850 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs) (550 lbs) Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
are on a label on the driver’s
doorjamb.
Example 2
Max Load (850 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs) (250 lbs)
Example 3
Max Load (850 lbs) Passenger Weight Cargo Weight
(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs) (100 lbs)

０７／０８／０７１８：１２：４７３１ＳＮＣ６２００１９２
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Items in the Passenger Carrying Cargo in the Trunk Air Intake
Compartment Distribute cargo evenly on the
Store or secure all items that could floor of the trunk, placing the AIR INTAKE
be thrown around and hurt heaviest items on the bottom and
someone during a crash. as far forward as possible.
Do not put any items on the rear If you carry large items that
shelf that could cover the IMA prevent you from closing the trunk
battery air intake. They can block lid, exhaust gas can enter the
your view, or be thrown around passenger area. To avoid the
Before Driving
the vehicle during a crash. possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
Be sure items placed on the floor on page 52 .
behind the front seats cannot roll
underneath and interfere with the The air intake for the IMA battery
proper operation of the seats, the and electronics is located on top of
sensors under the seats, or the the rear shelf. Do not block this air
driver’s ability to operate the intake; it may cause the IMA battery
pedals. and the power control unit to
overheat, causing the IMA system to
Keep the glove box closed while shut down. It will start working again
driving. If it is open, a passenger after it cools.
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：１２：５０３１ＳＮＣ６２００１９３
Carrying Cargo
Do not spill any liquids over the air

intake or put any small foreign
objects in it. This may damage the
IMA battery and the power control
unit.

０７／０８／０７１８：１２：５４３１ＳＮＣ６２００１９４
Main Menu
Driving
This section gives you tips on Preparing to Drive ......................... 190

starting the engine under various Starting the Engine........................ 191
conditions, and how to operate the Automatic Transmission (CVT) .. 192
automatic transmissions (CVT). It Parking ............................................ 198
also includes important information Braking System.............................. 199
on parking your vehicle, the braking Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 200
system and the tire pressure Towing a Trailer ............................ 201
monitoring system (TPMS). Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ....................................... 202
Driving
０７／０８／０７１８：１３：０３３１ＳＮＣ６２００１９５
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks 4. Check that any items you may be 9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
and adjustments before you drive carrying are stored properly or your passengers have fastened
your vehicle. fastened down securely. their seat belts (see page 14 ).
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, 5. Check the seat adjustment (see 10. When you start the engine, check
and outside lights are clean and page 90 ). the gauges and indicators in the
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow, instrument panel (see page 57 ).
or ice. 6. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
2. Check that the hood and trunk are page 95 ).
fully closed.
7. Check the steering wheel
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire adjustment (see page 76 ).
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure (see page 233 ). 8. Make sure the doors are securely
closed and locked.

０７／０８／０７１８：１３：１２３１ＳＮＣ６２００１９６
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake. Starting in Cold Weather

In cold weather, conventional starter
2. In cold weather, turn off all The immobilizer system protects your is used instead of the IMA system
electrical accessories to reduce vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly- starter. This is normal.
the drain on the battery. coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
3. Make sure the shift lever is in more inf ormation, see page 78 .
Park. Press on the brake pedal. The engine is harder to start in cold
5. If the engine does not start within weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
4. Without touching the accelerator 15 seconds, or starts but stalls altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
pedal, turn the ignition key to the right away, repeat step 4 with the meters) adds to this problem.
START (III) position. Do not hold accelerator pedal pressed halfway
Driving
the key in the START (III) down. If the engine starts, release
position for more than 15 seconds pressure on the accelerator pedal
at a time. If the engine does not so the engine does not race.
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again. 6. If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.

０７／０８／０７１８：１３：１８３１ＳＮＣ６２００１９７
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
Continuously Variable Shift Lever Position Indicators The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
Transmission (CVT) few seconds when you turn the
Honda’s Continuously Variable ignition switch to the ON (II)
Transmission’s unique design position. If it flashes while driving (in
provides a smooth, constant flow of any shift position), it indicates a
power. It is electronically controlled possible problem in the transmission.
for more precise operation and
better fuel economy. If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.

０７／０８／０７１８：１３：２６３１ＳＮＣ６２００１９８
Shifting To shift from: Do this: If you have done all of the above and
P to R Press the brake pedal and still cannot move the lever out of
RELEASE BUTTON SHIFT LEVER press the release button. Park, see Shift Lock Release on
R to P page 195 .
N to R Press the release button.
S to L You must also press the release
L to S button to shift into Park. To avoid
S to D transmission damage, come to a
D to N Move the lever. complete stop before shifting into
D to S Park. The shift lever must be in Park
N to D before you can remove the key from
R to N the ignition switch.
Driving
Park (P) − This position mechani-
To shift from Park to any position, cally locks the transmission. Use
press firmly on the brake pedal and Park whenever you are turning off or
press the release button on the front starting the engine. To shift out of
of the shift lever, then pull the lever. Park, you must press on the brake
You cannot shift out of Park when pedal and have your foot off the
the ignition switch is in the LOCK accelerator pedal. Press the release
(0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position. button on the front of the shift lever
to move it.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：１３：３３３１ＳＮＣ６２００１９９
Reverse (R) − Press the brake allow the engine to run at higher Engine Speed Limiter
pedal and press the release button speeds when it is cold. When the vehicle reaches the
on the front of the shift lever to shift maximum speed in any shift position,
from Park to reverse. To shift from Second (S) − Selecting Second you may feel the engine cut in and
reverse to neutral, come to a shifts the transmission into a lower out. This is caused by a limiter (112
complete stop, and then shift. Press range of ratios for better mph, 180 km/h) in the engine’s
the release button before shifting acceleration and increased engine computer controls. The engine will
into reverse from neutral. braking. Use Second when you are run normally when you reduce the
going down a steep hill. speed to below the maximum.
Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if Low (L) − To shift to Low, press
it is necessary to stop briefly with the release button on the front of the
the engine idling. Shift to the Park shift lever. Use Low to get more
position if you need to leave your power when climbing, and for
vehicle for any reason. Press on the maximum engine braking when
brake pedal when you are moving going down steep hills.
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear. For faster acceleration when in D, S
or L, the transmission will
Drive (D) − Use this position for automatically ‘‘kick down’’ to a lower
your normal driving. The range of ratios by pushing the
transmission automatically adjusts to accelerator pedal to the floor.
keep the engine at the best speed for
driving conditions. To help the
engine warm up faster, the
transmission will select ratios that

０７／０８／０７１８：１３：４２３１ＳＮＣ６２００２００
Shift Lock Release RELEASE

Do this if pushing on the brake pedal BUTTON
and pressing the release button does
not shift the transmission out of
Park:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.
COVER SHIFT LOCK
3. Put a cloth on the notch of the
Driving
NOTCH RELEASE SLOT
shift lock release slot cover. Using
a small flat-tipped screwdriver or a 4. Insert a key into the shift lock 6. Remove the key from the shift
metal fingernail file, carefully pry release slot. lock release slot, then install the
on the notch of the cover to cover. Make sure the notch on the
remove it. 5. Push down on the key while you cover is on the shift lever side.
press the release button on the Return the key to the ignition
shift lever and move the shift lever switch, press the brake pedal, and
out of Park to neutral. restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock

release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.

０７／０８／０７１８：１３：５３３１ＳＮＣ６２００２０１
Auto Idle Stop The front window defroster is off. The Auto Idle Stop function may
To maximize fuel economy, your activate when you slow down.
Civic Hybrid has an Auto Idle Stop The Auto Idle Stop function activates
function. Under certain conditions, if you speed up to over 8 mph
the engine will shut off when you (12 km/h) and brake to a stop.
come to a stop. Those conditions are: When speeding up to a speed below
8 mph (12 km/h) and braking to a
The engine coolant is nearly up to stop, it will only operate two times.
normal operating temperature.
The engine will start again when you
The shift lever is in D or N. release the brake pedal. It will also
restart, even if you are still pressing
You are not pressing on the the brake pedal, under these
accelerator pedal. conditions:
You are pressing on the brake You move the shift lever from D
pedal. or N to R or L.
The IMA battery is charged You press the accelerator pedal.

enough to operate the system.
You are on an incline, and the
Fan speed − lower fan speeds, in vehicle begins rolling.
either AUTO or manual modes.
Outside temperature is between

10 − 100 degrees F.

０７／０８／０７１８：１３：５９３１ＳＮＣ６２００２０２
Auto Idle Stop Indicator If you open the driver’s door when
Auto Stop is active, the indicator will
blink and you will hear a continuous
beep. The beep will stop when you
close the door.
With the driver’s door open, you will

hear a continuous beep even if the
Auto Idle Stop function is
deactivated and the engine restarts.
Always turn the ignition switch to
Driving
AUTO IDLE STOP INDICATOR the LOCK (0) position and remove
the key if you are getting out of the
The indicator blinks as a reminder vehicle.
that the engine has stopped because
of the Auto Idle Stop function. You
cannot restart the engine with the
ignition switch when this indicator is
blinking.

０７／０８／０７１８：１４：０９３１ＳＮＣ６２００２０３
Parking
Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips If the vehicle is facing downhill,
you park your vehicle. Make sure Make sure the windows are closed. turn the front wheels toward the
the parking brake is set firmly, or curb.
your vehicle may roll if it is parked Turn off the lights.
on an incline. Make sure the parking brake is
Place any packages, valuables, etc., fully released before driving away.
Set the parking brake before you put in the trunk or take them with you. Driving with the parking brake
the transmission in Park. This keeps partially set can overheat or
the vehicle from moving and putting Lock the doors. damage the rear brakes.
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission. Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set. Never install a sunshade between the
upper and lower meters on the
Never park over dry leaves, tall instrument panel. If you do, you could
grass, or other flammable cause heat damage to the upper meter
materials. The hot three way on a very hot day.
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn

the front wheels away from the
curb.

０７／０８／０７１８：１４：１８３１ＳＮＣ６２００２０４
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with front Check the brakes after driving Cooperative Control with Regenerative
disc brakes. The brakes on the rear through deep water. Apply the Brake
wheels are drum. A power assist brakes moderately to see if they feel This feature controls the braking
helps reduce the effort needed on normal. If not, apply them gently and pressure appropriately, coordinating
the brake pedal. The ABS helps you frequently until they do. Be extra with the regenerating brake of the
retain steering control when braking cautious in your driving. IMA motor.
very hard.
Your vehicle is equipped with an Creep Aid System
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps advanced hydraulic booster. When you release the brake pedal
the brakes applied lightly, builds up The advanced hydraulic booster has while the Auto Idle Stop function
heat, and reduces their effectiveness some features. activates, this feature keeps the
and reduces brake pad life. In braking pressure until the engine
Driving
addition, fuel economy can be Power-Assist starts, and prevents the vehicle from
reduced. It also keeps your brake This feature enables you to press the dropping back.
lights on all the time, confusing brake pedal with less force by the
drivers behind you. help of hydraulic pressure in the oil Brake-Assist
pressure pump. This feature helps you apply the
Constant application of the brakes brakes with less force during an
when going down a long hill builds emergency braking situation.
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.

０７／０８／０７１８：１４：２６３１ＳＮＣ６２００２０５
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Braking System Design The anti-lock brake system (ABS) ABS activates. However, you may
The hydraulic system that operates helps prevent the wheels from feel the ABS activate immediately if
the brakes has two separate circuits. locking up, and helps you retain you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
Each circuit works diagonally across steering control by pumping the
the vehicle (the left-front brake is brakes rapidly, much faster than a ABS Indicator
connected with the right-rear brake, person can do it.
etc.). If one circuit should develop a If this indicator comes on, the anti-
problem, you will still have braking The electronic brake distribution lock function of the braking system
at two wheels. (EBD) system, which is part of the has shut down. The brakes still work
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear like a conventional system, but
Brake Pad Wear Indicators braking distribution according to without anti-lock. You should have
If the brake pads need replacing, you vehicle loading. your dealer inspect your vehicle as
will hear a distinctive, metallic soon as possible.
screeching sound when you apply You should never pump the brake pedal.
the brake pedal. If you do not have Let the ABS work for you by always If the ABS indicator comes on while
the brake pads replaced, they will keeping firm, steady pressure on the driving, test the brakes as shown on
screech all the time. It is normal for brake pedal. This is sometimes page 256 .
the brakes to occasionally squeal or referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
squeak when you apply them.
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
the brake pedal very hard before the

０７／０８／０７１８：１４：３４３１ＳＮＣ６２００２０６
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS), Towing a Trailer
If the ABS indicator and the brake Important Safety Reminders Towing a Trailer
system indicator come on together, ABS does not reduce the time or Your vehicle is not designed to tow a
and the parking brake is fully distance it takes to stop the trailer. Attempting to do so can void
released, the EBD system may also vehicle. It only helps with steering your warranties.
be shut down. control during braking.
Test your brakes as instructed on ABS will not prevent a skid that
page 256 . If the brakes feel normal, results from changing direction
drive slowly and have your vehicle abruptly, such as trying to take a
repaired by your dealer as soon as corner too fast or making a sudden
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking lane change. Always drive at a safe
which could cause the rear wheels to speed for the road and weather
Driving
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of conditions.
control.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
A vehicle with ABS may require a

longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock.

０７／０８／０７１８：１４：４３３１ＳＮＣ６２００２０７
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
U.S. models only Low Tire Pressure Driving on a significantly under-

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire Indicator inflated tire causes the tire to
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) When the low tire pressure indicator overheat and can lead to tire failure.
that turns on every time you start the is on, one or more of your tires is Under-inflation also reduces fuel
engine and monitors the pressure in significantly underinflated. You efficiency and tire tread life, and may
your tires while driving. should stop and check your tires as affect the vehicle’s handling and
soon as possible, and inflate them to stopping ability.
Each tire has its own pressure the proper pressure as indicated on
sensor (not including the spare tire). the vehicle’s tire information placard. Because tire pressure varies by
If the air pressure of a tire becomes temperature and other conditions,
significantly low while driving, the If you think you can safely drive a the low tire pressure indicator may
sensor in that tire immediately sends short distance to a service station, come on unexpectedly.
a signal that causes the low tire proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
pressure indicator to come on. the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire

pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 243 ).
If you cannot make the low tire

pressure indicator go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.

０７／０８／０７１８：１４：５０３１ＳＮＣ６２００２０８
For example, if you check and fill information label and in the owner’s When you restart the vehicle with
your tires in a warm area, then drive manual (see page 234 ). the compact spare tire, the TPMS
in extremely cold weather, the tire indicator may also come on and stay
pressure will be lower than Tire Pressure Monitoring on after driving several miles
measured and could be underinflated System (TPMS) Indicator (kilometers).
and cause the low tire pressure This indicator comes on and stays on
indicator to come on. Or, if you if there is a problem with the tire
check and adjust your tire pressure pressure monitoring system.
in cooler conditions, and drive into
extremely hot conditions, the tire If this happens, the system will shut
may become overinflated. However, off and no longer monitor tire
the low tire pressure indicator will pressures. Have the system checked
Driving
not come on if the tires are by your dealer as soon as possible.
overinflated.
Refer to page 233 for tire inflation

guidelines.
Although your tire pressure is

monitored, you must manually check
the tire pressures monthly.
Each tire, including the spare, should

be checked monthly when cold, and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the tire

０７／０８／０７１８：１４：５８３１ＳＮＣ６２００２０９
Changing a Tire with TPMS The low tire pressure indicator or As required by the FCC:
If you have a flat tire, the low tire the TPMS indicator will go off, after This device complies with Part 15 of the
pressure indicator will come on. several miles (kilometers) driving, FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
Replace the flat tire with the when you replace the spare tire with following two conditions: (1) This device
compact spare tire (see page 243 ). the specified regular tire equipped may not cause harmful interference, and
with the tire pressure monitor sensor. (2) this device must accept any
Each wheel (except the compact interference received, including
spare tire wheel) is equipped with a Never use a puncture-repairing agent interference that may cause undesired
tire pressure sensor mounted inside in a flat tire. If used, you will have to operation.
the tire behind the valve stem. You replace the tire pressure sensor.
must use TPMS specific wheels. It is Have the flat tire repaired by your Changes or modifications not expressly
recommended that you always have dealer as soon as possible. approved by the party responsible for
your tires serviced by your dealer or compliance could void the user’s
qualified technician. authority to operate the equipment.
After you replace the flat tire with This device complies with Industry
the compact spare tire, the low tire Canada Standard RSS-210.
pressure indicator stays on. This is Operation is subject to the following two
normal; the system is not monitoring conditions: (1) this device may not cause
the spare tire pressure. Manually interference, and (2) this device must
check the spare tire pressure to be accept any interference that may cause
sure it is correct. After several miles undesired operation of the device.
(kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.

０７／０８／０７１８：１５：０３３１ＳＮＣ６２００２１０
Main Menu
Maintenance
This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety ....................... 206

important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Minder ..................... 207
maintained and how to follow basic Fluid Locations............................... 214
maintenance safety precautions. Adding Engine Oil ......................... 215
Changing the Oil and Filter .......... 216
This section also includes Engine Coolant ............................... 218
instructions on how to read the Windshield Washers ..................... 220
maintenance minder messages on Transmission Fluid .........................221
the information display, and Continuously Variable
instructions for simple maintenance Transmission (CVT) ............. 221
tasks you may want to take care of Brake Fluid ..................................... 222
yourself. Lights .............................................. 223
Roof Antenna ................................. 228
If you have the skills and tools to Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 229
Maintenance
perform more complex maintenance Floor Mats ...................................... 229
tasks on your vehicle, you may want Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 230
to purchase the service manual. See Wiper Blades .................................. 230
page 283 for information on how to Wheels ............................................ 233
obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Tires ................................................ 233
Checking the 12 Volt Battery ....... 239
Vehicle Storage .............................. 240

０７／０８／０７１８：１５：１３３１ＳＮＣ６２００２１１
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this Wear eye protection and Burns from hot parts. Let the
section should be performed by a protective clothing when working engine and exhaust system cool
certified technician or qualified with the battery or compressed air. down before touching any parts.
mechanic.
Injury from moving parts. Do
Important Safety Precautions not run the engine unless
To eliminate potential hazards, read Improperly maintaining this instructed to do so.
the instructions before you begin, vehicle, or failing to correct a
and make sure you have the tools problem before driving can
and skills required. cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed. Failure to properly follow
Make sure your vehicle is parked maintenance instructions and
on level ground, the parking brake Always follow the inspection precautions can cause you to
is set, and the engine is off. and maintenance be seriously hurt or killed.
recommendations and
To clean parts, use a commercially schedules in this owner’s Always follow the procedures
available degreaser or parts manual. and precautions in this owner’s
cleaner, not gasoline. manual.
To reduce the possibility of fire or Potential Vehicle Hazards Some of the most important safety
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, Carbon Monoxide poison from precautions are given here. However,
and flames away from the battery engine exhaust. Be sure there is we cannot warn you of every
and all fuel-related parts. adequate ventilation whenever you conceivable hazard that can arise in
operate the engine. performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.

０７／０８／０７１８：１５：２０３１ＳＮＣ６２００２１２
Maintenance Minder
Your vehicle displays engine oil life Engine Oil Life Display The remaining engine oil life is
and maintenance service items on shown on the display according to
the information display to show you SEL/RESET BUTTON this table:
when you should have your dealer
perform engine oil replacement and Calculated Engine Displayed
indicated maintenance service. Oil Life (%) Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %−91 % 100 %
Based on the engine operating 90 %−81 % 90 %
conditions and accumulated engine 80 %−71 % 80 %
revolutions, the onboard computer in 70 %−61 % 70 %
your vehicle calculates the remaining 60 %−51 % 60 %
engine oil life and displays it as a 50 %−41 % 50 %
percentage. ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY 40 %−31 % 40 %
30 %−21 % 30 %
Maintenance
To see the current engine oil life, 20 %−16 % 20 %
turn the ignition switch to the ON 15 %−11 % 15 %
(II) position, and press the SEL/ 10 %−6 % 10 %
RESET button repeatedly until the 5 %−1 % 5%
engine oil life display appears (see 0% 0%
page 64 ).
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：１５：２６３１ＳＮＣ６２００２１３
Maintenance Minder
The maintenance item code or codes

indicate the main and sub items
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S) required at the time of the oil change
(see page 213 ).
ENGINE OIL MAINTENANCE

LIFE DISPLAY MINDER INDICATOR
If the remaining engine oil life is 15 When the remaining engine oil life is
to 6 percent, you will see the engine 5 to 1 percent, you will see a
oil life indicator every time you turn ‘‘SERVICE OIL LIFE’’ message
the ignition switch to the ON (II) along with the same maintenance
position. The maintenance minder item code(s), every time you turn the
indicator will also come on, and the ignition switch to the ON (II)
maintenance item code(s) for other position.
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
next to the engine oil life indicator.

０７／０８／０７１８：１５：３３３１ＳＮＣ６２００２１４
Maintenance Minder
You can change the information

display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer, the trip
meter, or the outside temperature
every time you press and release the
SEL/RESET button.
When the engine oil life is 0 percent

or negative mileage, the
maintenance minder indicator
remains on even if you change the
information display.
Immediately have the service done,
Maintenance
When the remaining engine oil life is If you still do not perform the and make sure to reset the display as
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator indicated maintenance, you will see described on the next page.
will blink. The display comes on negative mileage. It is displayed
every time you turn the ignition when you drive more than 10 miles
switch to the ON (II) position. When (for U.S. models) or 10 km (for
you see this message, have the Canadian models) after seeing the 0
indicated maintenance performed by percent message. Afterward, it
your dealer as soon as possible. shows your driving distance if you
continue to drive. Immediately have
the indicated maintenance done by
your dealer.

０７／０８／０７１８：１５：４１３１ＳＮＣ６２００２１５
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Main Items and Sub Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Items Display
Your dealer will reset the display
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
position.
If maintenance service is done by

someone other than your dealer,
MAINTENANCE reset the maintenance minder as
SUB ITEM follows: 3. Press the SEL/RESET button for
about 10 seconds. The engine oil
All maintenance items displayed on 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON life and the maintenance item
the information display are in code. (II) position. code(s) will blink.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page 213 . 2. Press the SEL/RESET button
repeatedly until the engine oil life
is displayed.

０７／０８／０７１８：１５：４８３１ＳＮＣ６２００２１６
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance However, service at a dealer is not

Precautions mandatory to keep your warranties
If you have the required service in effect. Maintenance may be done
done but do not reset the display, or by any qualified service facility or
reset the display without doing the person who is skilled in this type of
service, the system will not show the automotive service. Make sure to
proper maintenance intervals. This have the service facility or person
can lead to serious mechanical reset the display as previously
problems because you will no longer described. Keep all receipts as proof
have an accurate record of when of completion, and have the person
maintenance is needed. who does the work fill out your
Honda Service History or Canadian
Your authorized Honda dealer Maintenance Log. Check your
4. Press the SEL/RESET button for knows your vehicle best and can warranty booklet for more
Maintenance
more than 5 seconds. The provide competent, efficient service. information.
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life We recommend using Honda parts
will reset to ‘‘100.’’ and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：１５：５７３１ＳＮＣ６２００２１７
Maintenance Minder
U.S. Vehicles: Owner’s Maintenance Checks Lights − Check the operation of

Maintenance, replacement, or You should check the following the headlights, parking lights,
repair of emissions control items at the specified intervals. If taillights, high-mount brake light,
devices and systems may be done you are unsure of how to perform turn signals, brake lights, and
by any automotive repair any check, turn to the appropriate license plate light monthly. See
establishment or individual using page listed. page 223 .
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards. Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
According to state and federal page 177 .
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked Engine coolant level − Check the
with ＃ will not void your emissions radiator reserve tank every time
warranties. However, all you fill the fuel tank. See page 178 .
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the Automatic transmission − Check
intervals indicated by the the fluid level monthly. See page
information display. 221 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level

monthly. See page 222 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure

monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
233 .

０７／０８／０７１８：１６：０４３１ＳＮＣ６２００２１８
Maintenance Minder
Symbol Maintenance Main Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items

A Replace engine oil1 1 Rotate tires
B Replace engine oil1 and oil filter 2 Replace air cleaner element
Inspect front and rear brakes If you drive in dusty conditions, replace
Check parking brake adjustment every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Inspect these items: Replace dust and pollen filter
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
Suspension components concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
Driveshaft boots from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS) miles (24,000 km).
Maintenance Minder
All fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect drive belt
Exhaust system＃ 3 Replace transmission fluid
Fuel lines and connections＃ 4 Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
1: If the message ‘‘SERVICE OIL’’ does not appear more than 12 months after 5 Replace engine coolant
the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
＃ : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 212 .
NOTE: Independent of the maintenance minder display, replace the brake fluid
every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

０７／０８／０７１８：１６：０８３１ＳＮＣ６２００２１９
Fluid Locations
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK BRAKE FLUID

(Orange loop) (Black cap)
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION (CVT)
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap) ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
RADIATOR CAP

０７／０８／０７１８：１６：１７３１ＳＮＣ６２００２２０
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL Recommended Engine Oil optimum engine protection. Make

FILL CAP Oil is a major contributor to your sure the API Certification Seal says
engine’s performance and longevity. ‘‘For Gasoline Engines’’.
Always use a premium-grade 0W-20
detergent oil displaying the API The oil viscosity or weight is
Certification Seal. This seal indicates provided on the container’s label.
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
Maintenance
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour in
the oil slowly and carefully so you do
not spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could Ambient Temperature
damage components in the engine
compartment. Reinstall the engine A very low-viscosity, fuel-efficient
oil fill cap, and tighten it securely. 0W-20 oil is the preferred engine
Wait a few minutes, and recheck the lubricant for your Civic Hybrid. This
oil level on the engine oil dipstick. Honda Motor Oil is the preferred special oil is formulated to help your
Do not fill above the upper mark; you 0W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is engine use less fuel. It is available at
could damage the engine. highly recommended that you use your dealer. A 5W-20 oil may be used
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for if 0W-20 is not available.

０７／０８／０７１８：１６：２６３１ＳＮＣ６２００２２１
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter
Synthetic Oil Changing the Oil and Filter HOLDING CLIP

You may use a synthetic motor oil if Always change the oil and filter
it meets the same requirements according to the maintenance
given for a conventional motor oil: it messages shown on the information
displays the API certification seal, display. The oil and filter collect
and it is the proper weight. You must contaminants that can damage your
follow the oil and filter change engine if they are not removed
intervals shown on the information regularly.
display.
Changing the oil and filter requires
Engine Oil Additives special tools and access from
Your vehicle does not require any oil underneath the vehicle. The vehicle BOLTS
additives. Additives may adversely should be raised on a service station-
affect the engine or transmission type hydraulic lift for this service. 3. Only on U.S. models
performance and durability. Unless you have the knowledge and Remove the nine holding clips
proper equipment, you should have with a flat-tipped screwdriver and
this maintenance done by a skilled two bolts, then pull the under-
mechanic. cover down.
1. Run the engine until it reaches

normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
2. Open the hood, and remove the

engine oil fill cap.

０７／０８／０７１８：１６：３６３１ＳＮＣ６２００２２２
Changing the Oil and Filter
DRAIN BOLT OIL FILTER 7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
8. Refill the engine with the

recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity

(including filter):
WASHER
3.4 US qt (3.2 )
4. Remove the oil drain bolt and 5. Remove the oil filter, and let the
Maintenance
washer from the bottom of the remaining oil drain. A special 9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
engine. Drain the oil into an wrench (available from your Start the engine. The oil pressure
appropriate container. dealer) is required. indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
Make sure the oil filter gasket is engine, and check your work.
not stuck to the engine block. If it
is, remove it before installing a 10. Let the engine run for several
new oil filter. minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
6. Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：１６：４４３１ＳＮＣ６２００２２３
Changing the Oil and Filter, Engine Coolant
11. Turn off the engine, let it sit for Adding Engine Coolant If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
several minutes, then check the oil available, you may use another
level on the dipstick. If necessary, RESERVE TANK major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
add more oil. temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant
12. Only on U.S. models recommended for aluminum engines.
Put the under-cover back in place Continued use of any non-Honda
and reinstall the nine holding clips. coolant can result in corrosion,
Lock the clips securely by pushing causing the cooling system to
on the center of each clip. malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you If the coolant level in the reserve
change your own oil, please dispose of tank is at or below the MIN line, add
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed coolant to bring it up to between the
container and take it to a recycling MIN and MAX lines. Inspect the
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin cooling system for leaks.
or dump it on the ground.
Always use Honda Long-Life
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 %
antifreeze and 50 % water. Never add
straight antifreeze or plain water.

０７／０８／０７１８：１６：５４３１ＳＮＣ６２００２２４
Engine Coolant
If the reserve tank is completely 4. The coolant level should be up to

empty, you should also check the the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant level in the radiator. coolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly and

carefully so you do not spill any.
Removing the radiator cap Clean up any spill immediately; it
while the engine is hot can could damage components in the
cause the coolant to spray out, engine compartment.
seriously scalding you.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and
Always let the engine and RADIATOR CAP tighten it fully.
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap. 1. Make sure the engine and radiator 6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Maintenance
are cool. Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling on the reserve tank.
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without Do not add any rust inhibitors or
pressing down. other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
3. Remove the radiator cap by compatible with the coolant or
pushing down and turning engine components.
counterclockwise.

０７／０８／０７１８：１６：５９３１ＳＮＣ６２００２２５
Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the Check the fluid level by removing
windshield washer reservoir at least the cap and looking at the level
monthly during normal use. gauge. Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
On Canadian models: The low washer Fill the reservoir with a good-quality windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
level indicator comes on when the windshield washer fluid. This can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
level is low (see page 61 ). increases the cleaning capability and a vinegar/water solution can damage
prevents freezing in cold weather. the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
When you refill the reservoir, clean washer f luid.
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition them.

０７／０８／０７１８：１７：０９３１ＳＮＣ６２００２２６
Transmission Fluid
Continuously Variable 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) 5. If the level is below the lower
Transmission (CVT) from the transmission, and wipe it mark, add fluid into the dipstick
with a clean cloth. hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into marks.
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration. Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda CVT Fluid

UPPER (Continuously Variable
Maintenance
DIPSTICK
HOT MARK Transmission fluid).
Check the fluid level with the engine Range LOWER
at normal operating temperature. MARK
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.

Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut 4. Remove the dipstick and check
off the engine. For accurate the fluid level. It should be
results, wait about 60 seconds (but between the upper and lower
no longer than 90 seconds) before marks within the HOT range.
doing step 2.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：１７：１８３１ＳＮＣ６２００２２７
Transmission Fluid, Brake Fluid
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back Brake Fluid

into the transmission securely. Check the brake fluid level in the MAX
reservoirs monthly.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid when this Replace the brake fluid every 3 years,
service is indicated by a maintenance independent of mileage.
message on the information display.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
If you are not sure how to add fluid, Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
contact your dealer. available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary MIN
replacement.
Check the fluid level several seconds
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can after you turn the ignition switch to
cause corrosion and decrease the life the ON (II) position. The fluid level
of the system. Have the brake should be between the MIN and
system flushed and refilled with MAX marks on the side of the
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid reservoir. If the level is at or below
DOT 3 as soon as possible. the MIN mark, your brake system
needs attention. Have the brake
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not system inspected for leaks or worn
compatible with your vehicle’s brake pads.
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.

０７／０８／０７１８：１７：２７３１ＳＮＣ６２００２２８
Lights
Headlight Aiming High Beam Headlight

The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you CLIP
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk, readjustment may be required.
Adjustments should be done by your
dealer or other qualified technician.
Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean CLIP COOLANT TUBE HOLDER
Maintenance
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth. 1. Open the hood. Remove the reserve tank from its
To change a bulb on the left side, holder by pulling it straight up.
remove the coolant tube from the
two clips.
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：１７：３７３１ＳＮＣ６２００２２９
Lights
4. Push the electrical connector back Low Beam Headlight

onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way. HOLDING CLIP
5. Install the new bulb, and turn it

one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
6. Turn on the headlights to test the

BULB new bulb.
TAB CONNECTOR 7. If you replaced a headlight bulb on
the driver’s side, reinstall the
2. Remove the bulb from the engine coolant reserve tank.
headlight assembly by turning it 1. To change the bulb on the driver’s
one-quarter turn counterclockwise. side, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
3. Remove the electrical connector right, then turn off the engine. To
from the bulb by pushing on the change the bulb on the passenger’s
tab and pulling the connector side, turn the steering wheel to the
down. left.
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to

remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender, and pull the inner
fender cover back.

０７／０８／０７１８：１７：４７３１ＳＮＣ６２００２３０
Lights
5. Install the new bulb, and turn it Replacing the Front Side Marker/
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock Turn Signal Light Bulb
it in place.
HOLDING CLIP
BULB 6. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
7. Turn on the headlights to test the

new bulb.
8. Reinstall the inner fender cover.

TAB Then reinstall the holding clips,
and lock them in place by pushing
Maintenance
3. Remove the bulb from the on their centers.
headlight assembly by turning it 1. To change the bulb on the driver’s
one-quarter turn counterclockwise. side, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
4. Remove the electrical connector right, then turn off the engine. To
from the bulb by pushing on the change the bulb on the passenger’s
tab and pulling the connector side, turn the steering wheel to the
down. left.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：１７：５８３１ＳＮＣ６２００２３１
Lights
4. Remove the bulb from the socket Replacing Rear Bulbs

by pushing the bulb in and turning (In Fenders)
it counterclockwise until it unlocks.
SOCKET
BULB FASTENER
5. Install the new bulb in the socket.
Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Insert the socket back into the

headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Turn on the lights to make sure

the new bulb is working.
FASTENER
8. Reinstall the inner fender cover.
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to Then reinstall the holding clips, 1. Open the trunk.
remove the two holding clips from and lock them in place by pushing Use the flat-tipped screwdriver to
the inner fender, and pull the inner on their centers. remove the screws in the center of
fender cover back. each fastener on the side of the
boot lining. Remove the fasteners
3. Remove the bulb from the first, then pull the lining back
headlight assembly by turning it carefully.
one-quarter turn counterclockwise. 2. Determine which of the four bulbs
is burned out: stop/tail-light, back-
up light, side marker light, or turn
signal light.

０７／０８／０７１８：１８：０９３１ＳＮＣ６２００２３２
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs

(in Trunk Lid)
BULB
BULBS SOCKETS
SOCKETS BULB FASTENER
Maintenance
3. Remove the socket by turning it 6. Turn on the lights to make sure 1. Open the trunk.
one-quarter turn counterclockwise. the new bulb is working.
Use the Phillips-head screwdriver to
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its 7. Reinstall the trunk lining. Make remove the screws in the center of
socket. Push the new bulb straight sure it is installed under the edge each fastener on the back of the boot
into the socket until it bottoms. of the trunk seal. lid. Remove the fasteners first, then
pull the lining back carefully.
5. Reinstall the socket into the light 8. Put the fasteners into the holes on
assembly by turning it clockwise the side of the trunk lining.
until it locks. Reinstall the screws.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：１８：１８３１ＳＮＣ６２００２３３
Lights, Roof Antenna
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its Roof Antenna

socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
BULB
4. Insert the socket back into the
light assembly. Turn it clockwise
to lock it in place.
5. Turn on the lights to make sure

the new bulb is working.
6. Push the trunk lid trim back into

position.
SOCKET
7. Put the fasteners into the holes on Before using an automatic car wash,
2. Remove the socket by turning it the trunk lid trim. Reinstall the remove the radio antenna so it does
one-quarter turn counterclockwise. screws. not get damaged. Remove the
antenna by unscrewing it. When you
reinstall the antenna, tighten it
securely.
Before entering or parking in areas

with low ceiling height, remove the
antenna.

０７／０８／０７１８：１８：２６３１ＳＮＣ６２００２３４
Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Cleaning the Seat Belts Floor Mats If you use non-Honda floor mats,
make sure they fit properly and that
LOOP they can be used with the floor mat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
Maintenance
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft The floor mats that came with your
brush with a mixture of mild soap vehicle hooks over the floor mat
and warm water to clean them. Do anchors. This keeps the floor mat
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning from sliding forward and possibly
solvents. Let the belts air dry before interfering with the pedals.
you use the vehicle.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat If you remove the driver’s floor mat,
belt anchors can cause the belts to make sure to re-anchor it when you
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of put it back in your vehicle.
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol. CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：１８：３３３１ＳＮＣ６２００２３５
Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades
Dust and Pollen Filter Wiper Blades WIPER ARMS

This filter removes the dust and Check the condition of the wiper
pollen that is brought in from the blades at least every 6 months.
outside through the heating and Replace them if you find signs of
cooling system/climate control cracking in the rubber, and areas
system. that are getting hard or if they leave
streaks and unwiped areas when
Have your dealer replace the filter used.
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations To replace a wiper blade:
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
the heating and cooling system 1. Raise each wiper arm off the
becomes less than usual. windshield, lifting the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
Do not open the hood when the wiper

arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.

０７／０８／０７１８：１８：４１３１ＳＮＣ６２００２３６
Wiper Blades
WIPER ARM BLADE
LOCK TAB
2. Disconnect the blade assembly Pivot the blade assembly toward 3. Remove the blade from its holder
Maintenance
from the wiper arm: the wiper arm until it releases by grabbing the tabbed end of the
from the wiper arm. blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
Put a cloth on the edge of the come out of the holder.
lock tab, then push up on the When replacing a wiper blade,
lock tab carefully with a flat-tip make sure not to drop the wiper
screwdriver. blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：１８：４９３１ＳＮＣ６２００２３７
Wiper Blades
4. Examine the new wiper blades. If 6. Slide the wiper blade assembly
they have no plastic or metal onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
reinforcement along the back locks in place.
edge, remove the metal TAB
reinforcement strips from the old 7. Make sure the blade is completely
wiper blade, and install them in installed and that its edge is not
the slots along the edge of the new bunched up.
blade.
8. Lower the wiper arm down against
REINFORCEMENT INDENT the windshield, the passenger’s
TOP
BLADE side first, then the driver’s side.
5. Place the top of the wiper blade on

the end of the blade assembly, and
slide the blade onto the assembly
in the direction pointed to by the
arrow.
Make sure the tab on the blade
assembly fits in the indent of the
wiper blade and the blade is
Make sure the three rubber tabs completely installed.
inside the blade fit to each notch of
the reinforcement, as shown.

０７／０８／０７１８：１９：０１３１ＳＮＣ６２００２３８
Wheels, Tires
Wheels Tires Inflation Guidelines

Clean the wheels as you would the To safely operate your vehicle, your Keeping the tires properly inflated
rest of the exterior. Wash them with tires must be the proper type and provides the best combination of
the same solution, and rinse them size, in good condition with adequate handling, tread life, and riding
thoroughly. tread, and correctly inflated. comfort.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a The following pages give more Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
protective clear-coat that keeps the detailed information on how to take adversely affect handling and fuel
aluminum from corroding and care of your tires and what to do economy, and are more likely to
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with when they need to be replaced. fail from being overheated.
harsh chemicals (including some Overinflated tires can make your
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff vehicle ride more harshly, are
brush can damage the clear-coat. To more prone to damage from road
clean the wheels, use a mild Using tires that are excessively hazards, and wear unevenly.
Maintenance
detergent and a soft brush or sponge. worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can On U.S. models
be seriously hurt or killed. The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
Follow all instructions in this pressure is low. See page 202 for
owner’s manual regarding tire more information.
inflation and maintenance. On Canadian models
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：１９：１２３１ＳＮＣ６２００２３９
Tires
On U.S. models If you check air pressures when the Recommended Tire Pressures
Even though your vehicle is tires are hot [driven for several miles The following chart shows the
equipped with TPMS, we (kilometers)], you will see readings 4 recommended cold tire pressures for
recommend that you visually check to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 most normal driving conditions.
your tires every day. If you think a kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
tire might be low, check it readings. This is normal. Do not let Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
immediately with a tire gauge. air out to match the recommended P195/65R15 89S Front/Rear:
cold air pressure. The tire will be 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2
Use a gauge to measure the air underinflated. kgf/cm )
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good You should get your own tire The compact spare tire pressure is:
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to pressure gauge and use it whenever 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per you check your tire pressures. This
month. Remember to check the will make it easier for you to tell if a See page 269 or refer to the tire
spare tire at the same time. pressure loss is due to a tire problem placard on the driver’s doorjamb for
and not due to a variation between correct tire pressure.
Check the air pressures when the gauges.
tires are cold. This means the For convenience, the recommended
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 While tubeless tires have some tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 ability to self-seal if they are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
km). Add or release air, if needed, to punctured, you should look closely
match the recommended cold tire for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressures. pressure.

０７／０８／０７１８：１９：２１３１ＳＮＣ６２００２４０
Tires
Tire Inspection INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS Tire Service Life

Every time you check inflation, you The service life of your tires is
should also examine the tires for dependent on many factors,
damage, foreign objects, and wear. including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
You should look for: loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
Bumps or bulges in the tread or environmental conditions (even
side of the tire. Replace the tire if when the tires are not in use).
you find either of these conditions.
In addition to your regular
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side TREAD WEAR INDICATOR inspections and inflation pressure
of the tire. Replace the tire if you maintenance, it is recommended that
can see fabric or cord. Your tires have wear indicators you have annual inspections
Maintenance
molded into the tread. When the performed once the tires reach five
Excessive tread wear. tread wears down, you will see a 1/2 years old. It is also recommended
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the that all tires, including the spare, be
tread. This shows there is less than removed from service after 10 years
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on from the date of manufacture,
the tire. regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
A tire this worn gives very little The last four digits of the TIN (tire
traction on wet roads. You should identification number) are found on
replace the tire if you can see three the sidewall of the tire and indicate
or more tread wear indicators. the date of manufacture (See Tire
Labeling on page 271 ).

０７／０８／０７１８：１９：３０３１ＳＮＣ６２００２４１
Tires
Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation Replacing Tires and Wheels

In addition to proper inflation, Replace your tires with radial tires of
correct wheel alignment helps to Front Front the same size, load range, speed
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire rating, and maximum cold tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer pressure rating (as shown on the
check the wheel alignment. tire’s sidewall).
Have your dealer check the tires if Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
you feel a consistent vibration while your vehicle can reduce braking
driving. A tire should always be ability, traction, and steering
rebalanced if it is removed from the accuracy. Using tires of a different
wheel. When you have new tires (Front Non-directional (Front Directional size or construction can cause the
installed, make sure they are Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels) ABS to work inconsistently.
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results, To help increase tire life and It is best to replace all four tires at
have the installer perform a dynamic distribute wear more evenly, rotate the same time. If that is not possible
balance. the tires according to the or necessary, replace the two front
maintenance messages displayed on tires or two rear tires as a pair.
the information display. Move the Replacing just one tire can seriously
tires to the positions shown in the affect your vehicle’s handling.
Improper wheel weights can damage chart each time they are rotated. If
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use you purchase directional tires, rotate
only Honda wheel weights f or only front-to-back.
balancing.

０７／０８／０７１８：１９：４１３１ＳＮＣ６２００２４２
Tires
The ABS works by comparing the Winter Driving

speed of the wheels. When replacing Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All
tires, use the same size originally Installing improper tires on your Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size vehicle can affect handling and weather tread design suitable for
and construction can affect wheel stability. This can cause a crash most winter driving conditions.
speed and may cause the system to in which you can be seriously
activate. hurt or killed. For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
If you ever replace a wheel, make Always use the size and type of snow tires or tire chains. They may
sure that the wheel’s specifications tires recommended in this be required by local laws under
match those of the original wheels. owner’s manual. certain conditions.
Also be sure you use only TPMS Snow Tires

specific wheels (if equipped). If you Wheel and Tire Specifications If you mount snow tires on your
Maintenance
do not, the tire pressure monitoring Wheels: vehicle, make sure they are radial
system will not work. 15 x 6 J tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
Replacement wheels are available at Tires: all four wheels. The traction
your dealer. P195/65R15 89S provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
See page 270 for DOT tire quality Check with the tire dealer for
grading information, and page maximum speed recommendations.
272 for tire size information.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：１９：４７３１ＳＮＣ６２００２４３
Tires
Tire Chains When installing cables, follow the

Mount tire chains on your tires when manufacturer’s instructions, and
required by driving conditions or mount them as tight as you can. Using the wrong chains, or not
local laws. Install them only on the Make sure they are not contacting properly installing chains, can
front tires. the brake lines or suspension. Drive damage the brake lines and
slowly with them installed. If you cause a crash in which you can
Because your vehicle has limited tire hear them coming into contact with be seriously injured or killed.
clearance, Honda strongly the body or chassis, stop and
recommends using the chains listed investigate. Remove them as soon as Follow all instructions in this
below, made by Security Chain you begin driving on cleared roads. owner’s manual regarding the
Company (SCC). selection and use of tire chains.
CH2311T
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.

０７／０８／０７１８：１９：５５３１ＳＮＣ６２００２４４
Checking the 12 Volt Battery
Check the terminals for corrosion (a

white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a The battery gives off explosive
solution of baking soda and water. It hydrogen gas during normal
will bubble up and turn brown. When operation.
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a A spark or flame can cause the
cloth or paper towel. Coat the battery to explode with enough
terminals with grease to help prevent force to kill or seriously hurt you.
further corrosion.
Wear protective clothing and a
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW If additional battery maintenance is face shield, or have a skilled
needed, see your dealer or a technician do the battery
Check the condition of the 12 volt qualified technician. maintenance.
Maintenance
battery monthly by looking at the
test indicator window. The label on WARNING: Battery posts,
the battery explains the test terminals, and related accessories If your vehicle’s 12 volt battery is
indicator’s colors. contain lead and lead compounds. disconnected or goes dead, the IMA
Wash your hands after handling. battery level gauge reading will not
be correct the next time you turn the
If you need to connect the battery to ignition switch to the ON (II)
a charger, disconnect both cables to position. It will show less than the
prevent damaging your vehicle’s actual level temporarily. It will show
electrical system. Always disconnect the correct level after you drive for
the negative (−) cable first, and at least 30 minutes.
reconnect it last.

０７／０８／０７１８：２０：０５３１ＳＮＣ６２００２４５
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for If the vehicle is to be stored for a as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
an extended period (more than 1 longer period, it should be which can damage the paint.
month), there are several things you supported on jackstands so the
should do to prepare it for storage. tires are off the ground. Reconnect the 12 volt battery and
Proper preparation helps prevent drive your vehicle every month for
deterioration and makes it easier to Leave one window open slightly (if about 30 minutes. This will keep
get your vehicle back on the road. If the vehicle is being stored the IMA battery charged and in
possible, store your vehicle indoors. indoors). good condition.
Fill the fuel tank. Disconnect the 12 volt battery. If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
Wash and dry the exterior Support the front wiper blade operating temperature (the
completely. arms with a folded towel or rag so cooling fans cycle on and off
they do not touch the windshield. twice). Preferably, do this once a
Clean the interior. Make sure the month.
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are To minimize sticking, apply a
completely dry. silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
Leave the parking brake off. Put vehicle body wax to the painted If this vehicle is unused f or over one
the transmission in Park. surfaces that mate with the door month, the service lif e of the 158V
and trunk seals. Nickel-Metal Hydride battery will be
Block the rear wheels. reduced and the battery may be
Cover the vehicle with a permanently damaged.
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such

０７／０８／０７１８：２０：０９３１ＳＮＣ６２００２４６
Main Menu
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire....................... 242

common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 243
experience with their vehicles. It If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 247
gives you information about how to Jump Starting ................................. 249
safely evaluate the problem and what If the Engine Overheats ............... 251
to do to correct it. If the problem has Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 253
stranded you on the side of the road, Charging System Indicator........... 254
you may be able to get going again. Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 255
If not, you will also find instructions Brake System Indicator ................ 256
on getting your vehicle towed. Fuses ............................................... 257
Fuse Locations ............................... 261
Emergency Towing ....................... 263

０７／０８／０７１８：２０：１８３１ＳＮＣ６２００２４７
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a Follow these precautions: INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced, Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can. This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
Check the inflation pressure of the surfaces. Use greater caution
compact spare tire every time you while driving.
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to: Do not mount snow chains on the
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) compact spare tire.
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is Replace the tire when you can see
the same make and model. the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
On vehicles with the TPMS and design tire, mounted on the
system, the low tire pressure same wheel. The spare tire is not
indicator comes on and stays on designed to be mounted on a regular
after you replace the flat tire with wheel, and the spare wheel is not
the compact spare tire. After designed for mounting a regular tire.
several miles (kilometers) driving
with the compact spare tire, the
TPMS indicator comes on and the
low tire pressure indicator goes off.

０７／０８／０７１８：２０：２６３１ＳＮＣ６２００２４８
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving, JACK TOOL CASE

stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until The vehicle can easily roll off
you get to an exit or an area to stop the jack, seriously injuring
that is far away from the traffic lanes. anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for

changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
TRUNK FLOOR SPARE TIRE
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and 3. Open the trunk. Raise the trunk
non-slippery ground. Put the floor by lifting up on the back edge.
transmission in Park. Apply the

parking brake. 4. Take the tool case out of the spare
tire.
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the 5. Unscrew the wing bolt and take
LOCK (0) position. Have all the spare tire out of its well.
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：２０：３３３１ＳＮＣ６２００２４９
JACKING POINTS
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
6. Remove the center cap from the 7. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn 8. Place the jack under the jacking
wheel with the extension. with the wheel nut wrench. point nearest the tire you need to
change. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.

０７／０８／０７１８：２０：４１３１ＳＮＣ６２００２５０
12. Put on the spare tire. Put the

wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
13. Lower the vehicle to the ground,

and remove the jack.
BRAKE HUB
WHEEL NUT WRENCH EXTENSION
9. Use the extension and the wheel 11. Before mounting the spare tire,
nut wrench as shown to raise the wipe any dirt off the mounting
vehicle until the flat tire is off the surface of the wheel and hub with

ground. a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
10. Remove the wheel nuts, then driving.
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：２０：５０３１ＳＮＣ６２００２５１
18. Store the jack in the tool case.

WING BOLT SPACER CONE
Loose items can fly around the

interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools

securely before driving.
For normal For spare
tire tire
19. Store the center cap in the trunk.
14. Tighten the wheel nuts securely in 15. Place the flat tire face down in the Make sure it does not get
the same crisscross pattern. Have spare tire well. scratched or damaged.
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service 16. Remove the spacer cone from the 20. Lower the trunk floor, then close
facility. wing bolt, turn it over, and put it the trunk lid.
Tighten the wheel nuts to: back on the bolt.
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
17. Secure the flat tire by screwing
the wing bolt back into its hole.

０７／０８／０７１８：２０：５８３１ＳＮＣ６２００２５２
If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t Nothing Happens or the Starter Turn the ignition switch to the
start falls into two areas, depending Motor Operates Very Slowly START (III) position. If the
on what you hear when you turn the When you turn the ignition switch to headlights do not dim, check the
ignition switch to the START (III) the START (III) position, you do not condition of the fuses. If the fuses
position: hear the normal noise of the engine are OK, there is probably
trying to start. You may hear a something wrong with the
You hear nothing, or almost clicking sound, a series of clicks, or electrical circuit for the ignition
nothing. The engine’s starter nothing at all. switch or starter motor. You will
motor does not operate at all, or Check these things: need a qualified technician to
operates very slowly. determine the problem. See
Check the transmission interlock. Emergency Towing on page 263 .
You can hear the starter motor The transmission must be in Park
operating normally, or the starter or neutral or the starter will not If the headlights dim noticeably or
motor sounds like it is spinning operate. go out when you try to start the
faster than normal, but the engine engine, either the battery is
does not start up and run. Turn the ignition switch to the ON discharged or the connections are

(II) position. Turn on the corroded. Check the condition of
headlights, and check their the 12 volt battery and terminal
brightness. If the headlights are connections (see page 239 ). You
very dim or do not come on at all, can then try jump starting the
the battery is discharged. See vehicle from a booster battery
Jump Starting on page 249 . (see page 249 ).

０７／０８／０７１８：２１：０６３１ＳＮＣ６２００２５３
If the Engine Won’t Start
The Starter Operates Normally Do you have fuel? Check the fuel If you find nothing wrong, you will
In this case, the starter motor’s gauge; the low fuel indicator may need a qualified technician to find
speed sounds normal, or even faster not be working. the problem. See Emergency
than normal, when you turn the Towing on page 263 .
ignition switch to the START (III) There may be an electrical
position, but the engine does not run. problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
Are you using a properly coded (see page 257 ).
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page 59 ).
Are you using the proper starting

procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on page 191 .

０７／０８／０７１８：２１：１５３１ＳＮＣ６２００２５４
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple To jump start your vehicle:

procedure, you should take several
precautions. 1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the 12 volt
battery.
A battery can explode if you do

not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
nearby. electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
Keep all sparks, open flames, battery can cause it to rupture. BOOSTER BATTERY
and smoking materials away
from the battery. 2. Turn off all electrical accessories: The numbers in the illustration show
heater, A/C, climate control, audio you the order to connect the jumper
system, lights, etc. Put the cables.

You cannot start your vehicle by transmission in Park, and set the
pushing or pulling it. parking brake. 3. Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (＋) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive (＋) terminal on the
booster battery.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：２１：２２３１ＳＮＣ６２００２５５
Jump Starting
6. Start the vehicle. If the starter If your vehicle’s 12 volt battery is

motor still operates slowly, check disconnected or goes dead, the IMA
that the jumper cables have good battery level gauge reading will not
metal-to-metal contact. be correct the next time you turn the
7. Once your vehicle is running, position. It will show less than the
disconnect the negative cable from actual level temporarily. It will show
your vehicle, then from the the correct level after you drive for
booster battery. Disconnect the at least 30 minutes.
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
4. Connect the second jumper cable Keep the ends of the jumper cables
to the negative (−) terminal on away from each other and any metal
the booster battery. Connect the on the vehicle until everything is
other end to the grounding strap disconnected. Otherwise, you may
as shown. Do not connect this cause an electrical short.
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
5. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

０７／０８／０７１８：２１：３１３１ＳＮＣ６２００２５６
If the Engine Overheats
The reading on the vehicle’s 2. If you see steam and/or spray

temperature gauge should stay in coming from under the hood, turn
the midrange. If it climbs to the red Driving with the temperature gauge off the engine. Wait until you see
mark, you should determine the reading at the red mark can cause no more signs of steam or spray,
reason (hot day, driving up a steep serious damage to your engine. then open the hood.
hill, etc.).
3. If you do not see steam or spray,
When the current fuel mileage is leave the engine running, and
shown on the display, the Steam and spray from an watch the temperature gauge. If
temperature gauge will interrupt on overheated engine can the high heat is due to overloading,
the display and blink for several seriously scald you. the engine should start to cool
times if the coolant temperature down almost immediately. If it
rises to 224°F (118°C) or more. At Do not open the hood if steam does, wait until the temperature
the same time, the beeper sounds is coming out. gauge reading comes down to the
once. midpoint, then continue driving.

If your vehicle overheats, you should 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. 4. If the temperature gauge stays at
take immediate action. The only Put the transmission in Park, and the red mark, turn off the engine.
indication may be the temperature set the parking brake. Turn off all
gauge climbing to or above the red accessories, and turn on the
mark. Or you may see steam or hazard warning indicators.
spray coming from under the hood.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：２１：３９３１ＳＮＣ６２００２５７
If the Engine Overheats
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks, 9. Start the engine, and set the
such as a split radiator hose. interior temperature to maximum.
Everything is still extremely hot, Removing the radiator cap Add coolant to the radiator up to
so use caution. If you find a leak, it while the engine is hot can the base of the filler neck. If you
must be repaired before you cause the coolant to spray out, do not have the proper coolant
continue driving (see Emergency seriously scalding you. mixture available, you can add
Towing on page 263 ). plain water. Remember to have
Always let the engine and the cooling system drained and
6. If you don’t find an obvious leak, radiator cool down before refilled with the proper mixture as
check the coolant level in the removing the radiator cap. soon as you can.
radiator reserve tank (see page
178 ). Add coolant if the level is 10. Put the radiator cap back on
below the MIN mark. 8. Using gloves or a large heavy tightly. Run the engine, and check
cloth, turn the radiator cap the temperature gauge. If it goes
7. If there was no coolant in the counterclockwise, without pushing back to the red mark, the engine
reserve tank, you may need to add down, to the first stop. After the needs repair (see Emergency
coolant to the radiator. Let the pressure releases, push down on Towing on page 263 ).
engine cool down until the reading the cap, and turn it until it comes
reaches the middle of the off. 11. If the temperature stays normal,
temperature gauge or lower check the coolant level in the
before checking the radiator. radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.

０７／０８／０７１８：２１：４６３１ＳＮＣ６２００２５８
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
This indicator should never 1. Safely pull off the road, and shut The engine running generates the oil
come on when the engine is off the engine. Turn on the hazard pressure. When the Auto Idle Stop is
running. If it starts flashing or stays warning lights. activated, the engine is stopped, the
on, the oil pressure has dropped very oil pressure is dropped, and the low
low or lost pressure. Serious engine 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. oil pressure indicator does not come
damage is possible, and you should Open the hood, and check the oil on.
take immediate action. level (see page 177 ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
damage almost immediately. Turn of f level back to the full mark on the
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get dipstick (see page 215 ).
the vehicle stopped.
4. Start the engine and watch the oil

pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
263 ).

０７／０８／０７１８：２１：５２３１ＳＮＣ６２００２５９
Charging System Indicator
If the charging system If the Auto Idle Stop is active for an

indicator comes on brightly extended period, the charging
when the engine is running, the 12 system indicator may come on. If it
volt battery is not being charged. happens, start the engine.
Immediately turn off all electrical The charging system indicator may
accessories. Try not to use other also come on if the Integrated Motor
electrically operated controls such as Assist (IMA) battery charge drops
the power windows. Keep the engine below a desired level and the engine
running; starting the engine will starts to recharge the battery.
discharge the battery rapidly.
This indicator may blink after you
Go to a service station or garage start the vehicle in the morning
where you can get technical when the temperature is below −20
assistance. °F (−30°C). It will stop blinking
when the IMA battery warms up.

０７／０８／０７１８：２１：５９３１ＳＮＣ６２００２６０
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If the indicator comes on If the indicator comes on repeatedly, If your vehicle’s battery has been
while driving, it means one even though it may turn off as you disconnected or gone dead, these
of the engine’s emissions control continue driving, have your vehicle codes are erased. It can take several
systems may have a problem. Even checked by your dealer as soon as days of driving under various
though you may feel no difference in possible. conditions to set the codes again.
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause To check if they are set, turn the
increased emissions. Continued ignition switch to the ON (II)
operation may cause serious damage. If you keep driving with the position, without starting the engine.
Malf unction Indicator Lamp on, you The malfunction indicator lamp will
If you have recently refueled your can damage your vehicle’s emissions come on for 20 seconds. If it then
vehicle, the indicator coming on controls and engine. Those repairs may goes off, the readiness codes are set.
could be due to a loose or missing not be covered by your vehicle’s If it blinks five times, the readiness
fuel fill cap. You will also see a warranties. This indicator may also codes are not set. If possible, do not
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message on come on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator. take your vehicle for an emissions
the information display. Tighten the test until the readiness codes are set.

cap until it clicks at least once. Readiness Code Refer to Emissions Testing for
Tightening the cap will not turn the Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness more information (see page 278 ).
indicator off immediately; it can take codes’’ that are part of the on-board
several days of normal driving. diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.

０７／０８／０７１８：２２：０６３１ＳＮＣ６２００２６１
Brake System Indicator
U.S. Canada The brake system However, if the brake pedal does not If the ABS indicator comes on with
indicator normally feel normal, you should take the brake system indicator, have
comes on when immediate action. A problem in one your vehicle inspected by your
you turn the ignition switch to the part of the system’s dual circuit dealer immediately.
ON (II) position and as a reminder to design will still give you braking at
check the parking brake. It will stay two wheels. You will feel the brake If the brake system indicator
on if you do not fully release the pedal go down much farther before (amber) comes on with the parking
parking brake. the vehicle begins to slow down, and brake system indicator (red) with
you will have to press harder on the the parking brake released, there
If the brake system indicator comes pedal. may be a malfunction with the
on while driving, the brake fluid level power-assist feature. When the
is probably low. Press lightly on the Slow down by shifting to a lower power-assist feature malfunctions,
brake pedal to see if it feels normal. gear, and pull to the side of the road the brake indicator (red) comes on
If it does, check the brake fluid level when it is safe. Because of the long and a buzzer sounds for a second.
the next time you stop at a service distance needed to stop, it is The power-assist feature may stop
station (see page 222 ). hazardous to drive the vehicle. You when the brake effect is weak. Stop
should have it towed and repaired as your vehicle immediately at a safe
If the fluid level is low, take your soon as possible (see Emergency place and contact a dealer.
vehicle to a dealer, and have the Towing on page 263 ).
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads. If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.

０７／０８／０７１８：２２：１２３１ＳＮＣ６２００２６２
Fuses
INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY) UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)
TAB
FUSE LABEL
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in The primary and secondary under-
three fuse boxes. hood fuse boxes are in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side.

The interior fuse box is underneath
the steering column.

０７／０８／０７１８：２２：２０３１ＳＮＣ６２００２６３
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses FUSE

If something electrical in your BLOWN BLOWN
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
261 and 262 , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that device. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
the cause. Replace any blown fuses,
and check if the device works.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the 3. Check each of the large fuses in
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the the primary under-hood fuse box
headlights and all other by looking through the top at the
accessories are off. wire inside. Remove the screws
with a Phillips-head screwdriver.
2. Remove the cover from the fuse
box.

０７／０８／０７１８：２２：２６３１ＳＮＣ６２００２６４
Fuses
If you cannot drive the vehicle

BLOWN without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a

spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
FUSE PULLER might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
4. Check the smaller fuses in the 5. Look for a blown wire inside the fuse with one of the correct rating as
under-hood fuse boxes and all the fuse. If it is blown, replace it with soon as you can.
fuses in the interior fuse box by one of the spare fuses of the same

pulling out each one with the fuse rating or lower. The spare fuses
puller provided in the primary are provided back of the under-
under-hood fuse box. hood fuse cover.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：２２：３０３１ＳＮＣ６２００２６５
Fuses
6. If the replacement fuse of the When the audio system is disabled,

same rating blows in a short time, the clock setting in the audio system
Replacing a f use with one that has a there is probably a serious will be canceled. You will need to
higher rating greatly increases the electrical problem with your reset the clock according to the
chances of damaging the electrical vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in instructions in the audio system
system. If you do not have a that circuit, and have your vehicle section in this owner’s manual.
replacement f use with the proper rating checked by a qualified technician.
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.

０７／０８／０７１８：２２：３９３１ＳＮＣ６２００２６６
Fuse Locations
UNDER-HOOD PRIMARY FUSE BOX UNDER-HOOD SECONDARY FUSE BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected
4 50 A Headlight Main
40 A Power Window Main
5 40 A Booster Motor
6 20 A Sub Fan Motor
7 20 A Main Fan Motor
8 30 A Rear Defogger
9 40 A Blower
10 10 A Hazard
11 15 A FI Sub
12 15 A Stop and Horn
13 15 A IG Coil (EX)
14 15 A IG Coil (IN)
15 7.5 A Oil Level

No. Amps. Circuits Protected 16 − Not Used No. Amps. Circuits Protected
17 − Not Used
1 100 A Main Fuse 18 20 A IG Coil 1 10 A IMA2
70 A EPS 19 15 A FI Main 2 7.5 A IMA1
2 60 A Option Main 20 7.5 A MG Clutch 3 15 A Booster MS
50 A Ignition Switch Main 21 15 A DBW
3 30 A ABS Motor 22 7.5 A Interior Light
30 A ABS F/S 23 10 A Back Up

０７／０８／０７１８：２２：４７３１ＳＮＣ６２００２６７
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected
17 10 A Left Headlight Low Beam

18 20 A Headlight High Main
19 15 A Small (Main)
20 − Not Used
21 20 A Headlight Low Main
22 (7.5 A) (HAC)
23 (7.5 A) STS
24 − Not Used
25 20 A Door Lock
26 20 A Driver’s Power Window
27 − Not Used
28 (15 A) Rear ACC Socket
29 15 A ACC
No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected 30 20 A Passenger’s Power Window
31 − Not Used
1 7.5 A Power Window 9 7.5 A ODS 32 20 A Right Rear Power Window
2 15 A Fuel Pump 10 7.5 A METER 33 20 A Left Rear Power Window
3 10 A IG1 ACG 11 10 A SRS 34 − Not Used
4 7.5 A ABS Unit 12 10 A Right Headlight High Beam 35 7.5 A ACC Radio
5 − Not Used 13 10 A Left Headlight High Beam 36 10 A HAC
6 − Not Used 14 7.5 A Small (Interior) 37 7.5 A Daytime Running Light
7 7.5 A TPMS＊ 15 7.5 A Small (Exterior) 38 30 A Wiper
8 − Not Used 16 10 A Right Headlight Low Beam ＊ : If equipped

０７／０８／０７１８：２２：５６３１ＳＮＣ６２００２６８
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed, If, due to damage, your vehicle must
call a professional towing service or be towed with the front wheels on
organization. Never tow your vehicle the ground, do this: Improper towing preparation will
with just a rope or chain. It is very damage the transmission. Follow the
dangerous. Start the engine. above procedure exactly. If you cannot
Press on the brake pedal. Move shif t the transmission or start the
There are two ways to tow your the shift lever through all its engine, your vehicle must be
vehicle: positions. transported with the f ront wheels of f
Shift to D position for 5 seconds, the ground.
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator then to N.
loads your vehicle on the back of a Turn off the engine. With the front wheels on the ground,
truck. This is the best way to Release the parking brake. it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
transport your vehicle. Leave the ignition switch in the than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow steering wheel does not lock.
truck uses two pivoting arms that go

under the tires (front) and lift them
off the ground. The other two tires
remain on the ground. This is an
acceptable way to tow your
vehicle.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：２３：００３１ＳＮＣ６２００２６９
Emergency Towing
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the The steering system can be damaged if
bumpers will cause serious damage. the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
The bumpers are not designed to ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
support the vehicle’s weight. position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.

０７／０８／０７１８：２３：０４３１ＳＮＣ６２００２７０
Main Menu
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give Identification Numbers ................. 266 Emissions Controls........................ 275
you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications ................................. 268 The Clean Air Act ...................... 275
your vehicle and the locations of the DOT Tire Quality Grading Crankcase Emissions Control
identification numbers. It also (U.S. Vehicles) ....................... 270 System..................................... 275
includes information you should Uniform Tire Quality Evaporative Emissions Control
know about your vehicle’s tires and Grading ................................... 270 System..................................... 275
emissions control systems. Treadwear .................................. 270 Onboard Refueling Vapor
Traction....................................... 270 Recovery ................................. 275
Temperature .............................. 271 Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 276
Tire Labeling .................................. 271 PGM-FI System ..................... 276
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Ignition Timing Control
(TPMS) − Required Federal System................................. 276
Explanation............................. 273 Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 276
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 276
Replacement Parts..................... 276
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 277
Emissions Testing ......................... 278

０７／０８／０７１８：２３：０９３１ＳＮＣ６２００２７１
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying

numbers in various places.
COVER
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
The VIN is also located on the

engine bulkhead. Slide the cover on CERTIFICATION LABEL
the engine compartment bulkhead to
view the VIN. Always close the cover
when finished.

０７／０８／０７１８：２３：１３３１ＳＮＣ６２００２７２
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into

the engine block. ENGINE NUMBER
The transmission number is on a

label on top of the transmission.
The IMA Motor Number is stamped

on the motor housing.
IMA MOTOR
NUMBER
TRANSMISSION NUMBER

０７／０８／０７１８：２３：２９３１ＳＮＣ６２００２７３
Specifications
Dimensions Capacities
Length 176.7 in (4,489 mm) Fuel tank Approx.
Width 69.0 in (1,752 mm) 12.3 US gal (46.6 )
Height 56.3 in (1,430 mm) Engine Change＊1 1.255 US gal (4.75 )
Wheelbase 106.3 in (2,700 mm) coolant Total 1.59 US gal (6.0 )
Track Front 59.1 in (1,501 mm) Engine oil Change＊2
Rear 60.2 in (1,529 mm) Including filter 3.4 US qt (3.2 )
Without filter 3.2 US qt (3.0 )
Weights Total 4.0 US qt (3.8 )
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached Automatic Change 3.0 US qt (2.8 )
to the driver’s doorjamb. transmission Total 5.4 US qt (5.1 )
fluid
Seating Capacities Windshield U.S. Vehicles 2.6 US qt (2.5 )
Total 5 washer Canada Vehicles 4.8 US qt (4.5 )
Front 2 reservoir
Rear 3
＊1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
Engine engine
Type Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC i-VTEC Reserve tank capacity: 0.11 US gal (0.4 )
gasoline engine with Hybrid Electric ＊2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
Bore x Stroke 2.87 x 3.15 in (73.0 x 80.0 mm)
Displacement 82 cu-in (1,339 cm )
Compression ratio 10.8
Spark plugs ILFR6J-11K (NGK)
SK20HPR-L11 (DENSO)

０７／０８／０７１８：２３：５０３１ＳＮＣ６２００２７４
Specifications
Air Conditioning Fuses

Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) Interior See page 257 or the fuse label
Charge quantity 14.1−15.9 oz (400−450 g) attached to the inside of the fuse
Lubricant oil type SE-10Y box door under the steering
column.
Lights Under-hood See page 257 or the fuse box
Headlights High 12 V − 60 W (HB3) cover.
Low 12 V − 51 W (HB4)
Front turn signal/side marker 12 V − 24/2.2 CP Alignment
lights Toe-in Front 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Rear turn signal lights 12 V − 21 W Rear 2.0 in (2.0 mm)
Brake/Taillights (in fenders) 12 V − 21/5 W Camber Front −0°3’
Back-up lights 12 V − 21 W Rear −1°39’
Rear side marker lights 12 V − 2 CP Caster Front 7°6’
Taillights (in trunk lid) 12 V − 3 CP
License plate lights 12 V − 5W Tires
Ceiling light 12 V − 8W Size Front/Rear P195/65R15 89S
Spotlights 12 V − 8W Spare T125/70D15 95M
Trunk light 12 V − 5W Pressure Front/Rear 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
12 Volt Battery
Capacity 12 V − 35 AH/20 HR
12 V − 28 AH/5 HR

０７／０８／０７１８：２３：５８３１ＳＮＣ６２００２７５
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all Treadwear Traction

U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. The treadwear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to
All tires are also graded for tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
treadwear, traction, and temperature the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tire’s ability to
performance according to conditions on a specified government stop on wet pavement as measured
Department of Transportation test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on
(DOT) standards. The following graded 150 would wear one and one- specified government test surfaces
explains these gradings. half (1 1/2) times as well on the of asphalt and concrete. A tire
government course as a tire graded marked C may have poor traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 100. The relative performance of performance.
Quality grades can be found where tires depends upon the actual condi-
applicable on the tire sidewall tions of their use, however, and may Warning: The traction grade
between tread shoulder and depart significantly from the norm assigned to this tire is based on
maximum section width. For due to variations in driving habits, straight-ahead braking traction tests,
example: service practices and differences in and does not include acceleration,
Treadwear 200 road characteristics and climate. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
Traction AA traction characteristics.
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform

to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.

０７／０８／０７１８：２４：０６３１ＳＮＣ６２００２７６
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles), Tire Labeling
Temperature Warning: The temperature grade for Tire Labeling

The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that The tires that came on your vehicle
highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not have a number of markings. Those
tire’s resistance to the generation of overloaded. Excessive speed, you should be aware of are described
heat and its ability to dissipate heat underinflation, or excessive loading, below.
when tested under controlled either separately or in combination,
conditions on a specified indoor can cause heat buildup and possible TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tire failure. (1)
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the (1)
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law. (4) (3) (2)
(1) Tire Size
(2) Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(3) Maximum Tire Pressure
(4) Maximum Tire Load
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：２４：２１３１ＳＮＣ６２００２７７
Tire Labeling
Tire Size 89 − Load index (a numerical code FW6X − Tire type code.
Whenever tires are replaced, they associated with the maximum
should be replaced with tires of the load the tire can carry). 2202 − Date of manufacture.
same size. The following is an Year
example of tire size with an S − Speed symbol (an Week
explanation of what each component alphabetical code indicating
means. the maximum speed rating). Maximum Tire Pressure
Max Press − The maximum air
P195/65R15 89S Tire Identification Number (TIN) pressure the tire can
The tire identification number (TIN) hold.
P − Vehicle type (P indicates is a group of numbers and letters
passenger vehicle). that look like the following example. Maximum Tire Load
TIN is located on the sidewall of the Max Load − The maximum load the
195 − Tire width in millimeters. tire. tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.
65 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section DOT B97R FW6X 2202
height as a percentage of its
width). DOT − This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
R − Tire construction code (R the U.S. Department of
indicates radial). Transportation.
15 − Rim diameter in inches. B97R − Manufacturer’s

identification mark.

０７／０８／０７１８：２４：２７３１ＳＮＣ６２００２７８
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
U.S. models only (If your vehicle has tires of a As an added safety feature, your
Each tire, including the spare (if different size than the size indicated vehicle has been equipped with a tire
provided), should be checked on the vehicle placard or tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
monthly when cold and inflated to inflation pressure label, you should that illuminates a low tire pressure
the inflation pressure recommended determine the proper tire inflation telltale
by the vehicle manufacturer on the pressure for those tires.)
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
CONTINUED

０７／０８／０７１８：２４：３４３１ＳＮＣ６２００２７９
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Driving on a significantly under- Your vehicle has also been equipped Always check the TPMS malfunction
inflated tire causes the tire to with a TPMS malfunction indicator telltale after replacing one or more
overheat and can lead to tire failure. to indicate when the system is not tires or wheels on your vehicle to
Under-inflation also reduces fuel operating properly. The TPMS ensure that the replacement or
efficiency and tire tread life, and may malfunction indicator is provided by alternate tires and wheels allow the
affect the vehicle’s handling and a separate telltale, which displays the TPMS to continue to function
stopping ability. symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated. properly.
Please note that the TPMS is not a When the malfunction indicator is
substitute for proper tire illuminated,
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has the system may not be able to detect
not reached the level to trigger or signal low tire pressure as
illumination of the TPMS low tire intended.
pressure telltale.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.

０７／０８／０７１８：２４：４２３１ＳＮＣ６２００２８０
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your The Clean Air Act intake manifold. They are then
vehicle’s engine produces several by- The United States Clean Air Act＊ drawn into the engine and burned.
products. Some of these are carbon sets standards for automobile
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen emissions. It also requires that Evaporative Emissions Control
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). automobile manufacturers explain to System
Gasoline evaporating from the tank owners how their emissions controls As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
also produces hydrocarbons. Con- work and what to do to maintain tank, an evaporative emissions
trolling the production of NOx, CO, them. This section summarizes how control canister filled with charcoal
and HC is important to the environ- the emissions controls work. adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
ment. Under certain conditions of canister while the engine is off. After
＊
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC In Canada, Honda vehicles comply the engine is started and warmed up,
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ with the Canadian emission the vapor is drawn into the engine
Carbon monoxide does not contri- requirements, as specified in an and burned during driving.
bute to smog creation, but it is a agreement with Environment
poisonous gas. Canada, at the time they are Onboard Refueling Vapor
manufactured. Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
Crankcase Emissions Control recovery (ORVR) system captures
System the fuel vapors during refueling. The
Your vehicle has a positive vapors are adsorbed in a canister
crankcase ventilation system. This filled with activated carbon. While
keeps gasses that build up in the driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
engine’s crankcase from going into into the engine and burned off.
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the

０７／０８／０７１８：２４：５１３１ＳＮＣ６２００２８１
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls Ignition Timing Control System Replacement Parts

The exhaust emissions controls This system constantly adjusts the The emissions control systems are
include four systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing, reducing the amount designed and certified to work to-
ignition timing control, exhaust gas of HC, CO, and NOx produced. gether in reducing emissions to
recirculation, and three way catalytic levels that comply with the Clean Air
converter. These four systems work Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Act. To make sure the emissions
together to control the engine’s System remain low, you should use only new
combustion and minimize the The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) Honda replacement parts or their
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that system takes some of the exhaust equivalent for repairs. Using lower
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust gas and routes it back into the intake quality parts may increase the
emissions control systems are manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the emissions from your vehicle.
separate from the crankcase and air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
evaporative emissions control of NOx produced when the fuel is The emissions control systems are
systems. burned. covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter warranty manual for more informa-
The PGM-FI system uses sequential The three way catalytic converter is tion.
multiport fuel injection. in the exhaust system. Through
It has three subsystems: air intake, chemical reactions, it converts HC,
engine control, and fuel control. The CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
powertrain control module (PCM) to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
uses various sensors to determine (N2), and water vapor.
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.

０７／０８／０７１８：２４：５７３１ＳＮＣ６２００２８２
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS Always use unleaded gasoline.
contains precious metals that serve Even a small amount of leaded
as catalysts, promoting chemical gasoline can contaminate the
reactions to convert the exhaust catalyst metals, making the three
gasses without affecting the metals. way catalytic converter ineffective.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts Keep the engine well maintained.
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part Have your vehicle diagnosed and
or its equivalent. repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
The three way catalytic converter U.S. model shown running properly.
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take A defective three way catalytic
place. It can set on fire any converter contributes to air pollution,
combustible materials that come and can impair your engine’s per-
near it. Park your vehicle away from formance. Follow these guidelines to
high grass, dry leaves, or other protect your vehicle’s three way
flammables. catalytic converter.

０７／０８／０７１８：２５：０７３１ＳＮＣ６２００２８３
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes 2. Make sure the vehicle has been the highway in D. Do not use the
If you take your vehicle for an parked with the engine off for 6 cruise control. When traffic allows,
emissions test shortly after the hours or more. drive for 90 seconds without
battery has been disconnected or moving the accelerator pedal.
gone dead, it may not pass the test. 3. Make sure the ambient (Vehicle speed may vary slightly;
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness temperature is between 40° and this is okay.) If you cannot do this
codes’’ that must be set in the on- 95°F (4° and 35°C). for a continuous 90 seconds
board diagnostics for the emissions because of traffic conditions, drive
systems. These codes are erased 4. Without touching the accelerator for at least 30 seconds, then repeat
when the battery is disconnected, pedal, start the engine, and let it it two more times (for a total of 90
and set again only after several days idle for 20 seconds. seconds).
of driving under a variety of
conditions. 5. Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase 8. Then drive in city/suburban
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and traffic for at least 10 minutes.
If the testing facility determines that hold it there until the temperature When traffic conditions allow, let
the readiness codes are not set, you gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the the vehicle coast for several
will be requested to return at a later scale (about 3 minutes). seconds without using the
date to complete the test. If you must accelerator pedal or the brake
get the vehicle retested within the 6. Without touching the accelerator pedal.
next two or three days, you can pedal and let the engine idle for 20
condition the vehicle for retesting by seconds. 9. Make sure the vehicle has been
doing the following. parked with the engine off for 30
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled minutes.
1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly, major highway where you can If the testing facility determines the
but not completely, full (around maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph readiness codes are still not set, see
3/4). for at least 20 minutes. Drive on your dealer.

０７／０８／０７１８：２５：１１３１ＳＮＣ６２００２８４
Main Menu
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service Information..... 280

Warranty Coverages ..................... 281
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 282
Authorized Manuals ...................... 283

０７／０８／０７１８：２５：１９３１ＳＮＣ６２００２８５
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
trained professionals. They should Customer Relations us this information:
be able to answer all your questions. Honda Canada Inc.
If you encounter a problem that your 715 Milner Avenue Vehicle Identification Number
dealership does not solve to your Toronto, ON (see page 266 )
satisfaction, please discuss it with M1B 2K8
the dealership’s management. The Name and address of the dealer
service manager or general manager Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 who services your vehicle
can help. Almost all problems are Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
solved in this way. Toronto (416) 287-4776 Date of purchase
If you are dissatisfied with the In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Mileage on your vehicle
decision made by the dealership’s Islands:
management, contact your Honda Bella International Your name, address, and tele-
Customer Service Office. P.O. Box 190816 phone number
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
U.S. Owners: A detailed description of the
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Tel: (787) 620-7546 problem
Honda Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A Name of the dealer who sold the
1919 Torrance Boulevard vehicle to you
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009

０７／０８／０７１８：２５：２９３１ＳＮＣ６２００２８６
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat Replacement Battery Limited
Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty − provides prorated
warranties: covered by a limited warranty. coverage for a replacement battery
Please read your warranty booklet purchased from your dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty − for details.

covers your new vehicle, except for Replacement Muffler Lifetime
the battery, emissions control Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Limited Warranty − provides
systems, and accessories, against − all exterior body panels are coverage for as long as the pur-
defects in materials and covered for rust-through from the chaser of the muffler owns the
workmanship. inside for the specified time period vehicle.
with no mileage limit.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Restrictions and exclusions apply to
Warranty and Emissions Accessory Limited Warranty − all these warranties. Please read the
Performance Warranty − these two Honda accessories are covered 2008 Honda warranty information
warranties cover your vehicle’s under this warranty. Time and booklet that came with your vehicle
emissions control systems. Time, mileage limits depend on the type of for precise information on warranty
mileage, and coverage are accessory and other factors. Please coverages. Your vehicle’s original
conditional. Please read your read your warranty booklet for tires are covered by their
warranty booklet for exact details. manufacturer. Tire warranty
information. information is in a separate booklet.
Replacement Parts Limited
Original Equipment Battery Limited Warranty − covers all Honda Canadian Owners
Warranty − this warranty gives up replacement parts against defects in Please refer to the 2008 warranty
to 100% credit toward a replacement materials and workmanship. manual that came with your vehicle.
battery.

０７／０８／０７１８：２５：３４３１ＳＮＣ６２００２８７
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a If NHTSA receives similar com- To contact NHTSA, you may call the
defect which could cause a crash or plaints, it may open an investigation, Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
could cause injury or death, you and if it finds that a safety defect 1-888-327-4236
should immediately inform the exists in a group of vehicles, it may (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
National Highway Traffic Safety order a recall and remedy campaign. http://www.saf ercar.gov; or write to:
Administration (NHTSA) in addition However, NHTSA cannot become Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
to notifying American Honda Motor involved in individual problems Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC
Co., Inc. between you, your dealer, or 20590.
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov.

０７／０８／０７１８：２５：４３３１ＳＮＣ６２００２８８
Main Menu
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) Service Manual:

The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online: repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
Go online at www. helminc. com for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356. Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
Publication Form Description troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
Form Number in your vehicle.
61SNC02 2006-2008 Honda Civic Hybrid Service Manual
61SNC02EL 2006-2008 Honda Civic Hybrid Body Repair Manual:
Authorized Manuals
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
61SNA30 2006 Model Series Honda Civic 2/4 Door of damaged body parts.
Body Repair Manual
31SNC620 2008 Honda Civic Hybrid Owner’s Manual
31SNC810 2008 Honda Civic Hybrid
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
31SNCM20 2008 Honda Civic Hybrid Honda Service History
31SNCQ20 2008 Honda Civic Hybrid Quick Start Guide
HON-R Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired

０７／０８／０７１８：２５：４５３１ＳＮＣ６２００２８９
Main Menu

０７／０８／０７１８：２５：５０３１ＳＮＣ６２００２９０
Main Menu
Index
A Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) B

Indicator ................................ 59, 200
Accessories..................................... 182 Operation .................................... 200 Battery
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Anti-theft, Audio System............... 166 Charging System
Position) ........................................ 79 Anti-theft Steering Column Indicator............................ 62, 254
Accessory Power Socket ................ 99 Lock ............................................... 79 Jump Starting ............................. 249
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 215 Armrest ......................................... 92 Maintenance ............................... 239
Airbag (SRS) ................................ 9, 21 Audio System ................................. 108 Specifications ............................. 269
Airbags, Additional Information .... 21 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ...... 81 Before Driving ............................... 173
Additional Safety Precautions .... 32 Auto Door Locking .......................... 81 Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 18
Advanced Airbag System ........... 26 Auto Door Unlocking ...................... 84 Beverage Holder .............................. 99
Airbag Service .............................. 32 Auto Idle Stop......................... 196, 197 Brakes
How the Passenger Airbag Off Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 19 Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 200
Indicator Works ....................... 31 Automatic Speed Control.............. 170 Break-in, New Linings .............. 174
How the Side Airbag Off Automatic Transmission (CVT) .. 192 Bulb Replacement ..................... 226
Indicator Works ....................... 30 Capacity, Fluid ........................... 268 Fluid ............................................ 222
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 30 Checking Fluid Level ................ 221 Pad Wear Indicator.................... 200
How Your Front Airbags Shifting ........................................ 193 Parking .......................................... 96
Work.......................................... 24 Shift Lever Position System Indicator ............ 58, 63, 256
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28 Indicators ................................ 192 Braking System.............................. 173
How Your Side Curtain Airbags Shift Lever Positions ................. 193 Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 174
Work.......................................... 29 Shift Lock Release ..................... 195 Brightness Control, Instruments ... 74
SRS Components ......................... 21 Brights, Headlights ......................... 73
INDEX
Air Conditioning System ............... 102
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 234
Antifreeze ....................................... 218 CONTINUED
2008 Civic Hybrid I

０７／０８／０７１８：２５：５５３１ＳＮＣ６２００２９１
Main Menu
Index
Bulb Replacement When to....................................... 207 D

Back-up Lights ........................... 227 Charging System Indicator .... 62, 254
Brake Lights ...................... 226, 227 Check Fuel Cap Indicator ............... 68 DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
Front Side Marker Lights......... 225 Checklist, Before Driving ............. 190 Dashboard .................................... 3, 56
Front Turn Signal Light ............ 225 Child Safety ...................................... 34 Daytime Running Lights................. 74
Headlights .................................. 223 Child Seats Defects, Reporting Safety............. 282
Parking Lights ........................... 225 LATCH Anchor System .............. 43 Defog and Defrost ......................... 106
Rear Side Marker Lights .......... 226 Lower Anchor .............................. 43 Defogger, Rear Window ................. 75
Rear Turn Signal Lights ........... 226 Tether Anchor ............................. 47 Defrosting the Windows ............... 106
Specifications ............................. 269 Childproof Door Locks ................... 81 Dimensions ..................................... 268
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 223 Cleaning the Wheels ..................... 233 Dimming the Headlights ................ 73
Clock, Setting the .......................... 168 Dipstick
C CO in the Exhaust ......................... 275 Automatic Transmission........... 221
Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 191 Engine Oil ................................... 177
Card, PC .......................................... 149 Compact Spare ............................... 242 Directional Signals ........................... 73
Capacities Chart............................. 268 Controls, Instruments and .............. 55 Disc Brake Pad Wear
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 52 Coolant Indicators .................................... 200
Carrying Cargo .............................. 184 Adding ......................................... 218 Disc Player...................................... 120
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii Checking ..................................... 178 Display Change Button ................... 64
CD Player........................................ 120 Proper Solution .......................... 218 Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 218
Ceiling Light ................................... 100 Temperature Gauge .................... 65 Doors
Certification Label ......................... 266 Crankcase Emissions Control Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.. 81
Chains ............................................. 238 System......................................... 275 Auto Door Locking ...................... 81
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 243 Cruise Control Operation ............. 170 Auto Door Unlocking .................. 84
Changing Oil Customer Service Information..... 280 Locking and Unlocking ............... 80
How to ......................................... 216 Power Door Locks ....................... 80
II 2008 Civic Hybrid

０７／０８／０７１８：２６：００３１ＳＮＣ６２００２９２
Main Menu
Index
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 270 Engine Speed Limiter ............... 194 Windshield Washer ................... 220
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5 Malfunction Indicator FM Stereo Radio
Driving ............................................ 189 Lamp ................................. 62, 255 Reception .................................... 161
Economy ..................................... 179 Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 62, 253 Four-way Flashers ........................... 75
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 230 Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 215 Front Airbags ............................... 9, 21
Overheating................................ 251 Fuel .................................................. 174
E Specifications ............................. 268 Fill Door and Cap....................... 175
Starting........................................ 191 Gauge ............................................ 66
Economy, Fuel ............................... 179 Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 275 Octane Requirement ................. 174
Emergencies on the Road............. 241 Exhaust Fumes ................................ 52 Oxygenated ................................ 174
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 249 Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat Reserve Indicator......................... 61
Brake System Indicator ............ 256 Belts by ......................................... 16 Tank, Filling the......................... 175
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 243 Fuses, Checking the ...................... 257
Charging System Indicator ...... 254 F
Checking the Fuses................... 257 G
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 253 Fan, Interior.................................... 103
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 255 Features .......................................... 101 Gas Mileage, Improving................ 179
Overheated Engine ................... 251 Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 175 Gasohol ........................................... 174
Emergency Brake ............................ 96 Filters Gasoline .......................................... 174
Emergency Flashers ....................... 75 Dust and Pollen .......................... 230 Fuel Reserve Indicator ................ 61
Emergency Towing ....................... 263 Oil ................................................ 216 Gauge ............................................ 66
Emergency Trunk Opener ............. 87 Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 75 Octane Requirement ................. 174
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 243 Tank, Filling the......................... 175
INDEX
Emissions Controls........................ 275
Emissions Testing ......................... 278 Fluids Gas Station Procedures................. 175
Engine Automatic Transmission........... 221
Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 65 Brake ........................................... 222 CONTINUED
2008 Civic Hybrid III

０７／０８／０７１８：２６：０７３１ＳＮＣ６２００２９３
Main Menu
Index
Gauges I J
Engine Coolant Temperature .... 65
Fuel ................................................ 66 Identification Number, Vehicle.... 266 Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 243
Gearshift Lever Positions Ignition Jack, Tire ........................................ 243
Automatic Transmission........... 192 Keys............................................... 77 Jump Starting ................................. 249
Glove Box ......................................... 99 Switch ............................................ 79
Timing Control System ............. 276 K
H Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 57 Keys ................................................... 77
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 223 Infant Restraint ................................ 39
Hazard Warning Flashers............... 75 Infant Seats L
Headlights LATCH Anchorage System ....... 43
Aiming ......................................... 223 Lower Anchors ............................ 43 Label, Certification ........................ 266
Daytime Running Lights............. 74 Tether Anchors............................ 47 Lane Change, Signaling .................. 73
High Beam Indicator ................... 60 Inflation, Recommended Tire ...... 234 Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 14, 18
Reminder Beeper ......................... 73 Pressures .................................... 234 LATCH Anchorage System............ 43
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 223 Information Display ......................... 64 Lights
Turning on .................................... 73 Inside Mirror .................................... 95 Bulb Replacement ..................... 223
Head Restraints ............................... 91 Inspection, Tire .............................. 235 Indicator ........................................ 60
Heated Mirrors ................................ 96 Instrument Panel ............................. 57 Parking .......................................... 73
High Altitude, Starting at .............. 191 Instrument Panel Lights ................. 58 Turn Signal ................................... 73
High-Low Beam Switch .................. 73 Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 74 Load Limits..................................... 185
Hood, Opening the ........................ 176 Interior Lights ................................ 100 LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 79
Horn................................................... 71 Introduction ......................................... i
IV 2008 Civic Hybrid

０７／０８／０７１８：２６：１３３１ＳＮＣ６２００２９４
Main Menu
Index
Locks N P
Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 79
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 175 Neutral Gear Position.................... 194 Panel Brightness Control ............... 74
Power Door .................................. 80 New Vehicle Break-in ................... 174 Park Gear Position......................... 193
Trunk ............................................ 87 NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i Parking ............................................ 198
Low Coolant Level ......................... 178 Numbers, Identification ................ 266 Parking Brake .................................. 96
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 61 Parking Brake and Brake
Lower Anchors................................. 43 O System Indicator .................. 58, 256
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 62, 253 Parking Lights.................................. 73
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 268 Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 174 Parking Over Things that Burn ... 198
Odometer .......................................... 64 PGM-FI System.............................. 276
M Odometer,Trip ................................. 64 Playing the Radio ........................... 110
Oil Playing a Disc ................................. 120
Maintenance ................................... 205 Change, How to ......................... 216 Playing a PC Card .......................... 149
Minder......................................... 207 Change, When to ....................... 207 Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 16
Minder Indicator .......................... 61 Checking Engine ....................... 176 Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
Owner’s Maintenance Pressure Indicator ............... 62, 253 Additional Safety Precautions .... 17
Checks .................................... 212 Selecting Proper Viscosity........ 215 Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16
Safety........................................... 206 ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 79 Protecting Children ......................... 34
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 62, 255 Onboard Refueling Vapor Protecting Infants ........................ 39
Meters, Gauges.......................... 57, 64 Recovery ..................................... 275 Protecting Larger Children ........ 48
Methanol in Gasoline .................... 174 Outside Mirrors ............................... 95 Protecting Small Children .......... 40
Mirrors, Adjusting ........................... 95 Outside Temperature Indicator ..... 67
INDEX
MP3/WMA ..................................... 120 Overheating, Engine ..................... 251
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 212
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 174 CONTINUED
2008 Civic Hybrid V

０７／０８／０７１８：２６：１７３１ＳＮＣ６２００２９５
Main Menu
Index
R Reverse Gear Position................... 194 Serial Number ................................ 266

Rotation, Tire ................................. 236 Service Intervals ............................ 213
Radiator Overheating .................... 251 Service Manual .............................. 283
Radio/CD/Sound System............. 108 S Service Station Procedures .......... 175
Radio/CD/PC Card Sound Setting the Clock ........................... 168
System......................................... 128 Safety Belts................................... 8, 18 Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 192
Readiness Codes .................... 255, 278 Safety Defects, Reporting............. 282 Shift Lock Release ......................... 195
Rear Lights, Bulb Safety Features .................................. 7 Side Airbags ................................. 9, 28
Replacement ....................... 226, 227 Airbags ............................................ 9 Off Indicator ........................... 30, 59
Rear View Mirror ............................. 95 Seat Belts ........................................ 8 Side Curtain Airbags ....................... 29
Rear Window Defogger .................. 75 Safety Labels, Location of .............. 53 Side Marker Lights, Bulb
Reclining the Seat-backs ................. 90 Safety Messages ............................... iii Replacement ............................... 225
Remote Transmitter ........................ 88 Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 18 Signaling Turns ................................ 73
Replacement Information Additional Information ................ 18 Snow Tires ...................................... 238
Dust and Pollen Filter ............... 230 Automatic Seat Belt Sound System ................................. 108
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 216 Tensioners ................................ 19 Spare Tire
Fuses ........................................... 258 Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 14, 18 Inflating ....................................... 242
Light Bulbs ................................. 223 Maintenance......................... 20, 229 Specifications ............................. 269
Maintenance Minder ................. 207 Reminder Light and Specifications Charts..................... 268
Tires ............................................ 233 Beeper ................................. 18, 58 Speed Control ................................. 170
Wiper Blades .............................. 230 System Components.................... 18 Speed-Sensitive Volume
Replacing Seat Belts After a Use During Pregnancy................ 16 Compensation (SVC) ........ 113, 138
Crash ............................................. 20 Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Spotlights ........................................ 100
Reserve Tank, Engine Belt ...................................... 14, 18
Coolant ................................ 178, 218 Seats, Adjusting the ......................... 90
Restraint, Child ................................ 34 Security System ............................. 169
VI 2008 Civic Hybrid

０７／０８／０７１８：２６：２１３１ＳＮＣ６２００２９６
Main Menu
Index
SRS, Additional Information........... 21 Supplemental Restraint Tire Chains ..................................... 238

Additional Safety Precautions .... 32 System................................... 9, 21 Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 243
Airbag Service .............................. 32 Servicing ....................................... 32 Tire Information ............................ 270
How the Passenger Airbag Off SRS Indicator.......................... 30, 59 Tires ................................................ 233
Indicator Works ....................... 31 System Components.................... 21 Air Pressure ............................... 234
How the Side Airbag Off SVC .......................................... 113, 138 Checking Wear .......................... 235
Indicator Works ....................... 30 Synthetic Oil ................................... 216 Compact Spare ........................... 242
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 30 DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 270
How Your Front Airbags T Inflation ....................................... 233
Work.......................................... 24 Inspection ................................... 235
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28 Taillights, Changing Maintenance ............................... 236
How Your Side Curtain Bulbs ................................... 226, 227 Replacing .................................... 236
Airbags Work ........................... 29 Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 241 Rotating....................................... 236
SRS Components ......................... 21 Technical Descriptions Service Life ................................. 235
SRS Indicator.............................. 30, 59 DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 270 Snow ............................................ 238
START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 79 Emissions Control Systems ...... 275 Specifications ............................. 269
Starting the Engine........................ 165 Oxygenated Fuels...................... 174 Tire Chains ................................. 238
In Cold Weather at High State Emissions Testing ........... 278 Tools, Tire Changing .................... 243
Altitude ................................... 191 Three Way Catalytic Towing
With a Dead Battery ................. 249 Converter ................................ 277 A Trailer ...................................... 201
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 251 Tire Labeling .................................. 272 Emergency Towing ................... 263
Steering Wheel Temperature Gauge ........................ 65 Traction Devices ............................ 238
Adjustment ................................... 75 Tether Anchorage Points ............... 47
INDEX
Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 79 Theft Protection............................. 166
Stereo Sound System .................... 108 Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 277
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 240 Time, Setting the ........................... 168 CONTINUED
2008 Civic Hybrid VII

０７／０８／０７１８：２６：２６３１ＳＮＣ６２００２９７
Main Menu
Index
Transmission Vehicle Identification Number..... 266 Defroster .................................... 106

Checking Fluid Level, Vehicle Storage .............................. 240 Washers ........................................ 72
Automatic ............................... 221 Ventilation ...................................... 105 Wipers, Windshield
Fluid Selection ................... 221, 222 VIN .................................................. 266 Changing Blades ........................ 230
Identification Number............... 267 Viscosity, Oil................................... 215 Operation ...................................... 72
Shifting the Automatic .............. 192 Worn Tires ..................................... 233
Treadwear ...................................... 270 W Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 263
Trip Meter ........................................ 66
Trunk................................................. 87 WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii
Opening......................................... 87 Warning Labels, Location of .......... 53
Open Monitor Light .................... 60 Warranty Coverages ..................... 281
Turn Signals ..................................... 73 Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 220
U Indicator ........................................ 61
Operation ...................................... 72
Unexpected, Taking Care Wheels
of the ........................................... 241 Adjusting the Steering ................ 76
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 270 Alignment and Balance ............. 236
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 174 Cleaning ...................................... 233
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 218 Compact Spare ........................... 242
Nut Wrench ................................ 243
V Windows
Operating the Power ................... 94
Vanity Mirror ................................... 98 Rear, Defogger ............................ 75
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 185 Windshield
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 268 Cleaning ........................................ 72
VIII 2008 Civic Hybrid

０７／０８／０７１８：２６：２８３１ＳＮＣ６２００２９８
Main Menu
2008 Civic Hybrid

０７／０８／０７１８：２６：３１３１ＳＮＣ６２００２９９
Main Menu
2008 Civic Hybrid

０７／０８／０７１８：２６：３３３１ＳＮＣ６２００３００
Main Menu
2008 Civic Hybrid

０７／０８／０７１８：２６：４４３１ＳＮＣ６２００３０１
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Automatic Transmission Fluid Brake Fluid:

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane (CVT): Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
number of 87 or higher. Use Honda CVT Fluid DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
(Continuously Variable DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
Fuel Tank Capacity: Transmission Fluid) only replacement (see page 222 ).
12.3 US gal (46.6 )
Capacity: Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Recommended Engine Oil: 3.0 US qt (2.8 ) Front/Rear:
API Premium grade 0W-20 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
detergent oil (see page 215 ).
Spare Tire:
Oil change capacity (including 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
filter):
3.4 US qt (3.2 )
2008 Civic Hybrid

０７／０８／０７１７：４６：１８３１ＳＮＣ６２００００１
Main Menu
Owner’s Identification
OWNER This owner’s manual should be

considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the
vehicle when it is sold.
ADDRESS
STREET This owner’s manual covers all
models of the Civic Hybrid. You may
find descriptions of equipment and
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ features that are not on your
POSTAL CODE particular model.
V. I. N.
The information and specifications
DELIVERY DATE included in this publication were in
(Date sold to original retail purchaser) effect at the time of approval for
printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
DEALER NAME DEALER NO. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications
ADDRESS or design at any time without notice
STREET and without incurring any obligation
whatsoever.
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/

POSTAL CODE
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
2008 Civic Hybrid

Main Menu: 2008 Civic Hybrid

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Main Menu: 2008 Civic Hybrid

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

０７／０８／０７ １７：４６：２２ ３１ＳＮＣ６２０ ０００２

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual

2008 Civic Hybrid i

California Proposition 65 Warning

Event Data Recorders

Service Diagnostic Recorders

ii 2008 Civic Hybrid

A Few Words About Safety

2008 Civic Hybrid iii

Owner's Identification Form

Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)

Contents Before Driving Warranty and Customer

Features Technical Information

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Your Vehicle at a Glance

MIRROR CONTROLS CLIMATE CONTROL

POWER WINDOW ACCESSORY

FUEL FILL DOOR

2008 Civic Hybrid 3

Your Vehicle at a Glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

2008 Civic Hybrid 5

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Important Safety Precautions

6 2008 Civic Hybrid

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

(3) (9) Your vehicle is equipped with many

Driver and Passenger Safety

2008 Civic Hybrid 7

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

8 2008 Civic Hybrid

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety

2008 Civic Hybrid 9

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags can pose hazards. To do

10 2008 Civic Hybrid

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction 2.Adjust the Front Seats

Driver and Passenger Safety

2008 Civic Hybrid 11

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

12 2008 Civic Hybrid

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

4.Adjust the Head Restraints When a passenger is seated in the

Driver and Passenger Safety

Adjust the seat-back to an

2008 Civic Hybrid 13

Main Menu Table Of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

5.Fasten and Position the Seat

If the seat belt touches or crosses

０７／０８／０７１７：４６：２２３１ＳＮＣ６２００００２